Movatterモバイル変換


[0]ホーム

URL:


US11135110B2 - Patient support apparatus - Google Patents

Patient support apparatus
Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US11135110B2
US11135110B2US16/727,136US201916727136AUS11135110B2US 11135110 B2US11135110 B2US 11135110B2US 201916727136 AUS201916727136 AUS 201916727136AUS 11135110 B2US11135110 B2US 11135110B2
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
patient
support apparatus
patient support
mattress
frame
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
US16/727,136
Other versions
US20200323717A1 (en
Inventor
Robert M. Zerhusen
Richard H. Heimbrock
Arpit Shah
Aziz A. Bhai
Bradley T. Smith
Catherine M. Wagner
Charles A. Lachenbruch
Clay G. OWSLEY
Dan R. Tallent
Daniel Nachtigal
David L. BEDEL
David J. BRZENCHEK
David J. Hitchcock
David P. Lubbers
Douglas A. Seim
Douglas E. Borgman
Eric D. Benz
Florin Iucha
Frank E. Sauser
Gavin M. Monson
James W. PASCOE
James L. Walke
Jared Rude
John G. Byers
John D. Christie
Jonathan D. Turner
Joshua A. Williams
Karen Lanning
Kathryn R. Smith
Kirsten M. Emmons
Mary Kay BRINKMAN
Michael Buccieri
Nathaniel W. HIXON
Neal Wiggermann
Richard J. Schuman, SR.
Scott M. Corbin
Sravan MAMIDI
Todd P. O'Neal
Todd S. VENTROLA
Travis Pelo
Unnati OJHA
John Goewert
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Hill Rom Services Inc
Original Assignee
Hill Rom Services Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Hill Rom Services IncfiledCriticalHill Rom Services Inc
Priority to US16/727,136priorityCriticalpatent/US11135110B2/en
Publication of US20200323717A1publicationCriticalpatent/US20200323717A1/en
Assigned to HILL-ROM SERVICES, INC.reassignmentHILL-ROM SERVICES, INC.ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS).Assignors: LACHENBRUCH, CHARLES A.
Assigned to HILL-ROM SERVICES, INC.reassignmentHILL-ROM SERVICES, INC.ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS).Assignors: RUDE, JARED, IUCHA, Florin, BRINKMAN, Mary Kay, LANNING, KAREN, NACHTIGAL, DANIEL, LUBBERS, DAVID P., BHAI, AZIZ A., HIXON, Nathaniel W., BEDEL, DAVID L., BORGMAN, DOUGLAS E., EMMONS, Kirsten M., SMITH, KATHRYN, WILLIAMS, JOSHUA A., GOEWERT, John, SAUSER, FRANK E., SCHUMAN, RICHARD J., SR., ZERHUSEN, ROBERT M., PELO, Travis, Byers, John G., HEIMBROCK, RICHARD H., MAMIDI, Sravan, OJHA, Unnati, Wagner, Catherine M., PASCOE, James W., BENZ, ERIC D., BRZENCHEK, David J., BUCCIERI, MICHAEL, CHRISTIE, JOHN D., CORBIN, SCOTT M., HITCHCOCK, DAVID J., MONSON, GAVIN M., O'NEAL, TODD P., OWSLEY, CLAY G., SEIM, DOUGLAS A., SHAH, ARPIT, SMITH, BRADLEY T., Tallent, Dan R., TURNER, JONATHAN D., VENTROLA, Todd S., WALKE, JAMES L., WIGGERMANN, Neal
Priority to US17/492,870prioritypatent/US12350211B2/en
Application grantedgrantedCritical
Publication of US11135110B2publicationCriticalpatent/US11135110B2/en
Assigned to HILL-ROM, INC., Bardy Diagnostics, Inc., BREATHE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., ALLEN MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC., Voalte, Inc., WELCH ALLYN, INC., HILL-ROM SERVICES, INC., HILL-ROM HOLDINGS, INC.reassignmentHILL-ROM, INC.RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644Assignors: JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.
Priority to US19/024,940prioritypatent/US20250186279A1/en
Activelegal-statusCriticalCurrent
Anticipated expirationlegal-statusCritical

Links

Images

Classifications

Definitions

Landscapes

Abstract

A patient support apparatus includes a base frame, lift mechanism supporting an upper frame relative to the base frame, a load frame, and a plurality of deck sections, a patient support surface, and a number of barriers positioned about the patient supporting surface. The patient support apparatus includes a notification system for visually notifying a caregiver of a condition or status of a component of the patient support apparatus.

Description

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/577,581 filed on Nov. 28, 2017, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 10,517,784, which was a U.S. national phase of PCT/US2016/034908, filed on May 29, 2016, which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/168,596, filed May 29, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/169,270, filed Jun. 1, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/197,294, filed Jul. 27, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/210,098, filed Aug. 26, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/256,233, filed Nov. 17, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/256,406, filed Nov. 17, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/256,408, filed Nov. 17, 2015, and U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/300,340, filed Feb. 26, 2016 all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
BACKGROUND
The present disclosure relates to patient support apparatuses. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to patient support apparatuses with improved functionality and usability.
There is an ongoing need to reduce the labor required for caregivers to deliver quality patient care. In addition, there is an ongoing need for the cost of healthcare to be reduced. Finally, the comfort of a person in an in-patient environment is directly related to their perception of the quality of their care and their recovery. A patient support apparatus that provides patient comfort, reduced cost, and improved caregiver efficiency addresses these needs.
SUMMARY
The present application discloses one or more of the features recited in the appended claims and/or the following features which, alone or in any combination, may comprise patentable subject matter:
According to a first aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus comprises a controller, a plurality of sensors coupled to the controller, and a notification system. The plurality of sensors coupled to the controller are each operable to provide a signal to the controller indicative of the status of a component of the patient support apparatus. The notification system is coupled to the controller and operable to process signals from the controller which provide an indication of the statuses of the components compared to established acceptable operating conditions, and, if the status of a particular component deviates from the established acceptable operating condition for that component, provides a visual indication of the deviation by illuminating a first iconic representation of the component in a first manner, if the status of the particular component does not deviate from the established acceptable operating condition for that component, illuminating the first iconic representation in a second manner.
In some embodiments, the notification system is operable to project the first iconic representation to a surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus.
In some embodiments, the first iconic representation is simultaneously illuminated on a surface of the patient support apparatus and projected onto the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus.
In some embodiments, the first iconic representation is projected to the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus by a projector located on the patient support apparatus.
In some embodiments, illuminating the first iconic representation in a first manner comprises illuminating the first iconic representation in a first color and illuminating the first iconic representation in a second manner comprises illuminating the first iconic representation in a second color.
In some embodiments, providing the visual indication of the deviation includes simultaneously illuminating a first iconic representation of the component on a surface of the patient support apparatus in a first color and projecting the first iconic representation of the component on the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus in the first color.
In some embodiments, providing the visual indication of the lack of a deviation includes simultaneously illuminating a first iconic representation of the component on a surface of the patient support apparatus in a second color and projecting the first iconic representation of the component on the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus in the second color.
In some embodiments, providing the visual indication of the deviation includes simultaneously illuminating a first iconic representation of the component on a surface of the patient support apparatus in a first color and projecting the first iconic representation of the component on the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus in the first color.
In some embodiments, providing the visual indication of the lack of a deviation includes simultaneously illuminating a first iconic representation of the component on a surface of the patient support apparatus in a second color and projecting the first iconic representation of the component on the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus in the second color.
In some embodiments, the surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus is the surface of a floor, the first iconic representation being projected to a position that is not directly below any portion of the patient support apparatus.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, an improved patient pendant for a patient support apparatus is ergonomically positioned. In some embodiments, the patient pendant may be positioned on a structure of a foot rail configured to orient the patient pendant to be seen and accessed while the patient is positioned on the patient support apparatus in a supine position. In other embodiments, the patient pendant may be positioned on a head siderail so as to be easily accessed by the patient supported on the patient support apparatus and a supine position. The patient pendant may include a spring-loaded grip which permits the patient pendant to be easily attached to a corresponding supporting structure on the patient support apparatus. In some embodiments, the patient pendant may be released by overcoming the spring force of the spring-loaded grip. In some embodiments, the patient pendant may be removed by sliding the patient pendant off of the supporting structure.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, a siderail of a patient support apparatus is configured to provide a storage space for personal items of a patient.
In still another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes a patient-visible head angle indicator positioned on an interior surface of a head siderail of the patient support apparatus.
In yet another aspect of the present disclosure, a head siderail of a patient support apparatus includes an angled handle formed in a portion of the head siderail nearest the head end of the patient support apparatus, the angled handle configured to permit a patient to grip the angled handle to assist with repositioning the patient in the patient support apparatus.
In still yet another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes an overhead arm with a reading light, a docking station for a smart phone or other personal digital assistant, a structure for docking the aforementioned patient pendant, and a USB charging port.
In a further aspect of the present disclosure, the patient support apparatus is configured to integrate with an electronic medical record system to permithospital bed10 side charting through a user interface on the patient support apparatus.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, a siderail of a patient support apparatus is configured to support a Pleur-evac device on the siderail to keep the Pleur-evac device from contacting the floor when the siderail is lowered and an upper frame of the patient support apparatus is in its lowest position.
In still another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes an integrated sequential compression device module that is configured to operate disposable garments used for the treatment of deep vein thrombosis. In some embodiments, the integrated sequential compression device module is controlled by the control system of the patient support apparatus with the graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus being used to operate the sequential compression device module.
In a further aspect of the present disclosure, a siderail of the patient support apparatus includes a permanent structure configured to support and retain a hand urinal device for easy accessibility by a patient supported on the patient support apparatus. In some embodiments, the permanent structure is configured to prevent movement of the hand urinal device along the siderail when the hand urinal device is in a stowed position.
In a still further aspect of the present disclosure, the patient support apparatus includes a patient position monitoring system which is operable to predict patient exit. In some embodiments, the patient position monitoring system includes an audible alarm system which provides voice prompts. In some embodiments, the voice prompt may encourage the patient to stay in the patient support apparatus until assistance is received. In some embodiments, the voice prompt is “Please stay inhospital bed10.”
In yet another further aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes a one-button egress function which is operable, when activated by a caregiver, to place the patient support apparatus in an idealized configuration for permitting egress of a patient from the patient support apparatus. In some embodiments, deck sections of the patient support apparatus are placed in a predefined position when the one-button egress function is activated. In some embodiments, an upper frame of the patient support apparatus is placed in a predefined position when the one-button egress function is activated. In some embodiments, a portion of an inflatable patient support surface is placed in a predefined state when the one-button egress function is activated. In some embodiments, the seat section of an inflatable patient support surface is deflated when the one-button egress function is activated. In other embodiments, the seat section of an inflatable patient support surface is inflated to a maximum inflation state when the one-button egress function is activated.
In a still further aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes an illuminated patient egress handle. In some embodiments, when a patient position monitoring system is active but not alarming, the outside of a siderail egress handle will illuminate green. In some embodiments, when a patient position monitoring system is active and alarming, the outside of the siderail egress handle will illuminate and flash and amber color until the alarm condition is silenced by a caregiver. In some embodiments, a patient support apparatus may detect that a patient has left the patient support apparatus and illuminate the outside of a siderail egress handle a blue color, providing a nightlight for the patient, until the patient support apparatus detects that the patient has returned to the patient support apparatus.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, the patient support apparatus includes a Foley bag holder positioned on a articulating foot deck section of the patient support apparatus, the Foley bag holder being angled relative to the foot deck section such that when the foot deck section is in a declined orientation, the Foley bag holder supports a Foley bag in a vertical orientation, compensating for the angle of the foot deck section relative to horizontal.
In still yet another aspect of the present disclosure, the patient position monitoring system of the patient support apparatus cooperates wirelessly with a detector configured to be positioned on a chair in the patient room, the chair detector operable to automatically arm and utilize the patient position monitoring system of the patient support apparatus to alarm if the patient exits the chair.
In still yet a further aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes an incontinence detection system which cooperates with the patient position monitoring system to predict a patient exit condition. In some embodiments, the incontinence detection system will provide an alert that is transmitted to a caregiver or a caregiver workstation informing the caregiver of the likely exiting of the patient due to an incontinent event or the patients need to void.
In a still further aspect of the present disclosure, sensors of the patient support apparatus are used to detect vital signs of the patient supported on the patient support apparatus.
In another further aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes internal diagnostics and service prediction functionality which communicates remotely to inform a service system that service is required on the patient support apparatus.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes a built-in RFID reader.
In yet another aspect of the present disclosure, the patient support apparatus includes in panels with integrated slots that facilitate the storage of power cords and excess lengths of lines, such as those used by a sequential compression device or IV systems.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, a barrier of a patient support apparatus includes integrated features to facilitate the routing of clinical lines, such as IV lines, oxygen lines, gastric tube lines, or the like.
According to yet another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support apparatus includes a frame, an air box, and a patient support structure. The patient support structure is supported by the frame which includes a head section, a foot section, and a seat section between the head section and foot section. The patient support structure further includes a cushion layer, an outer ticking layer, and a microclimate structure. The outer ticking layer includes an upper surface portion positioned to support a patient. The microclimate structure is positioned within the outer ticking layer and between the cushion layer and the upper surface portion. The microclimate structure includes an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer. A material of at least a portion of the upper layer is vapor and liquid permeable, a material of the middle layer is air permeable, and a material of the lower layer is liquid impermeable.
In some embodiments, the microclimate structure extends from an upper end of the head section to a lower end of the seat section of the patient support structure, excluding the foot section of the patient support structure.
In some embodiments, the microclimate structure extends from an upper end of the head section to a lower end of the foot section of the patient support structure.
In some embodiments, the air box is further coupled to a conduit to conduct pressurized air through the microclimate structure.
In some embodiments, the vapor and liquid permeable portion of the upper layer of the microclimate structure defines a therapeutic region.
In some embodiments, the therapeutic region of the upper layer of the microclimate structure comprises a perforated material.
In some embodiments, the therapeutic region of the upper layer of the microclimate structure comprises a highly breathable, vapor and liquid permeable material.
In some embodiments, a non-therapeutic region of the upper layer of the microclimate structure comprises a vapor permeable but liquid impermeable material.
In some embodiments, the therapeutic region corresponds approximately to pelvic and torso regions of a supine patient substantially laterally centered on the seat section of the patient support structure.
In some embodiments, the middle layer of the microclimate structure comprises a three-dimensional material configured to conduct air between the upper layer and the lower layer of the microclimate structure.
In some embodiments, the middle layer of the microclimate structure comprises more than one section of the three dimensional material, in which at least one section of the three dimensional material conducts and delivers air along a therapeutic region.
In some embodiments, at least one of the sections of the middle layer of the microclimate structure is positioned at a foot section of the patient support structure and does not conduct air.
In some embodiments, the conduit is coupled to the bottom layer of the microclimate structure.
In some embodiments, the conduit is positioned at a lower end of the seat section of the patient support structure near a therapeutic region.
In some embodiments, the middle layer of the microclimate structure conduct air from the conduit to the therapeutic region of the microclimate structure, wherein the air generally flows predominantly laterally and longitudinally toward the head section of the patient support structure.
In some embodiments, the foot section of the microclimate structure comprises foam padding.
In some embodiments, the cushion layer includes a first inflatable support bladder and a second inflatable support bladder, and an air distribution sleeve extends between the first inflatable support bladder and the second inflatable support bladder.
In some embodiments, the cushion layer includes foam paddings.
In some embodiments, the outer ticking layer comprises a vapor permeable and liquid impermeable material.
In some embodiments, the outer ticking layer encases the microclimate structure.
In some embodiments, the outer ticking layer encases the microclimate structure and the cushion layer.
According to still another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support structure includes a cushion layer and a microclimate structure. The microclimate structure is integrated atop the cushion layer. The microclimate structure further includes an upper layer, an air permeable middle layer, and a liquid impermeable lower layer. The upper layer includes a vapor and liquid permeable therapeutic region. The therapeutic region is arranged to underlie pelvic and torso regions of a patient lying supine on the patient support structure.
In some embodiments, the therapeutic region of the microclimate structure comprises a perforated material.
In some embodiments, the therapeutic region of the microclimate structure comprises a highly breathable, vapor and liquid permeable material.
In some embodiments, the middle layer of the microclimate structure comprises a three-dimensional material configured to conduct air between the upper layer and the lower layer of the microclimate structure.
In some embodiments, the middle layer of the microclimate structure comprises more than one section of the three dimensional material, in which at least one section of the three dimensional material conducts and delivers air along a therapeutic region.
In another aspect of the present disclosure, a patient support structure includes a microclimate structure including an upper layer, an air permeable middle layer, and a liquid impermeable lower layer. The upper layer has having a vapor and liquid permeable therapeutic region. The therapeutic region is shaped to underlie pelvic and torso regions of a patient lying supine on the patient support structure. The microclimate structure further receives air from a conduit coupled to the microclimate structure near the therapeutic region of the microclimate structure.
In still another aspect of the present disclosure a patient-support apparatus comprises a deck, a mattress, and a turning assembly interposed between the deck and the mattress. The turning assembly includes a plate structure having a lower plate, an intermediate plate pivtoable relative to the lower plate about a first axis generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of the mattress, and an upper plate pivtoable relative to the intermediate plate about a second axis generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of the mattress. The second axis is spaced apart from the first axis. The turning assembly further includes a first pair of bladders positioned between the lower plate and the intermediate plate and inflatable to cause rotation of the intermediate plate relative to the lower plate. The turning assembly also includes a second pair of bladders positioned between the intermediate plate and the upper plate and inflatable to cause rotation of the upper plate relative the intermediate plate.
In some embodiments, the lower plate and intermediate plate are coupled through a hinge.
In some embodiments, the intermediate plate and the upper plate are coupled through a hinge.
In some embodiments, each of the bladders is secured to a respective plate such that the bladder is fixed relative to the respective plate.
In some embodiments, each of the bladders of each of the first and second bladder pairs is fixed to a separate plate.
In some embodiments, neither a first bladder nor a second bladder of each bladder pair are coupled to the other of the first and second bladder such that there is freedom of movement between the first and second bladders as either of the first and/or second bladders are inflated.
In some embodiments, the intermediate plate does not engage either of the upper plate or lower plate.
In some embodiments, rotation of the intermediate plate relative to the lower plate causes rotation of the upper plate relative to the lower plate.
In some embodiments, rotation of the upper plate relative to the intermediate plate does not cause rotation of the intermediate plate relative to the lower plate.
In some embodiments, wherein each of the bladder is independently inflatable.
In some embodiments, the pressure in at least one of the bladders is monitored.
In some embodiments, the patient-support apparatus includes a user interface which allows a user to control the inflation of at least one of the bladders.
In some embodiments, the patient-support apparatus includes a user interface which allows a user to control the deflation of at least one of the bladders.
In some embodiments, at least one of the bladders is secured to at least one of the plates by a strap.
Additional features, which alone or in combination with any other feature(s), including those listed above and those listed in the claims, may comprise patentable subject matter and will become apparent to those skilled in the art upon consideration of the following detailed description of illustrative embodiments exemplifying the best mode of carrying out the invention as presently perceived.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
The detailed description particularly refers to the accompanying figures in which:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view from a patient's left side of a patient support apparatus illustratively embodied as ahospital bed10;
FIG. 2 is another perspective view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the patient support apparatus including a patient support surface illustratively embodied as a mattress positioned on thehospital bed10;
FIG. 4 is a plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 as viewed from the foot end of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 5 is a plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 as viewed from the head end of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 6 is a plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 as viewed from the patient's right side of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 7 is a plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 3 as viewed from the patient's left side of the patient support apparatus with the siderails of thehospital bed10 in a lowered position;
FIG. 8 is a plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 as viewed from above;
FIG. 9 is a bottom plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 3 with a head section and a thigh section of a deck of the patient support apparatus being raised;
FIG. 11 is an exploded assembly view of a base frame and they lift system of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 12 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of a patient support apparatus including a powered auxiliary wheel assembly mounted to a base frame of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 13 is an exploded assembly view of a top portion of a foot deck section of a patient support apparatus;
FIG. 14 is an exploded assembly view of a bottom portion of a foot deck section of a patient support apparatus, the foot deck section having an actuator two power extension retraction of the foot deck section;
FIG. 15 is an exploded assembly view of the bottom of another embodiment of a foot deck section of a patient support apparatus, the foot deck section being manually releasable to extend and retract the foot deck section;
FIG. 16 is an exploded assembly view of the foot deck section ofFIG. 15;
FIG. 17 is an exploded assembly view of the bottom of a foot deck section having a manually actuated gatching mechanism;
FIG. 18 is exploded assembly view of a portion of a notification system supported on the end of the foot deck section of a patient support apparatus, the notification system operable to provide a visual indication of the status of components of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a projection structure of the notification system ofFIG. 18, the projection structure including a slide that includes an iconic image that is projected by the projection structure to a surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 20 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, including a load frame and portions of a deck supported on the load frame;
FIG. 21 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of the structureFIG. 20;
FIG. 22 is exploded assembly view of the structure ofFIG. 20 with additional components shown inFIG. 22 for clarity;
FIG. 23 is an exploded assembly view of an enlarged portion of the structure ofFIG. 22;
FIG. 24 is a perspective view of a portion of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 25 is an exploded assembly view similar toFIG. 24, the structure shown inFIG. 25 having a wider lateral width to accommodate larger patients;
FIG. 26 is an exploded view of a portion of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 showing the assembly of intermediate side rails of the patient support apparatus as assembled to a linkage that is secured to a load frame of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 27 is an exploded assembly view similar toFIG. 26,FIG. 27 including spacers to space of the siderails of the patient support apparatus further away from frame members to accommodate the wider width of the structure ofFIG. 25;
FIG. 28 is an exploded assembly view of an embodiment of a right head side rail suitable for use with the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 29 is exploded assembly view of an embodiment of a left head side rail suitable for use with the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 30 is an exploded assembly view of an airbox assembly having a pneumatic control system for operating a pneumatic mattress;
FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of the pneumatics of the airbox assembly ofFIG. 30;
FIG. 32 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of the patient support apparatus including an unpowered auxiliary wheel which assist with steering the patient support apparatus as it's moved over the floor;
FIG. 33A is an exploded assembly view of elongated push handle assembly for use with the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 33B is an exploded assembly view of another elongated push handle assembly for use with the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 34 is a perspective view of a portion of the powered auxiliary wheel ofFIG. 12;
FIG. 35 is an exploded assembly view of the structure ofFIG. 34;
FIG. 36 is exploded assembly view of an auxiliary outlet assembly mounted on a base frame of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1
FIG. 37 is an exploded assembly view of the patient support surface ofFIG. 3;
FIG. 38 is exploded assembly view of a core of the patient support surface ofFIG. 37;
FIG. 39 is exploded assembly view of another embodiment of the patient support surface including self-adjusting technology;
FIG. 40 is exploded assembly view of still another patient support surface assembly including pneumatically operated components configured to be operated by the airbox ofFIG. 30;
FIG. 41 is a diagrammatic representation of a portion of a turning structure of the patient support surface ofFIG. 40;
FIG. 42 is diagrammatic representation of a portion of an alternate structure of a body support of the patient support surface ofFIG. 40;
FIG. 43 is a diagrammatic representation of the structure ofFIG. 42 with a head section of the underlying patient support apparatus in a raised position and the body support having additional structures inflated to accommodate the inclination of the head section;
FIG. 44 is a perspective view of a connector assembly of the patient support surface ofFIG. 40 being connected to the airbox ofFIG. 30;
FIGS. 45A-45C are exploded assembly views showing the assembly of the airbox ofFIG. 30 to the lower side of a foot deck of a patient support apparatus;
FIG. 46A is a perspective view of a portion of a patient pendant as viewed from the patient facing surface of the pendant;
FIG. 46B is a perspective view of the pendant ofFIG. 46A as viewed from the side opposite the patient facing surface;
FIG. 46C is an exploded assembly view of the pendant ofFIG. 46A;
FIG. 47A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a patient support apparatus with including electrical enclosures to enclose portions of the electrical system of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 47B is a top plan view of a portion of the head deck of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 with covers removed to show the mounting of electrical circuit boards;
FIG. 47C is an exploded assembly view of the mounting of one of the circuit board assembliesFIG. 47B;
FIG. 47D is an exploded assembly view of one of the circuit board assemblies ofFIG. 47B being positioned in an enclosure;
FIG. 48 is a perspective view of a head panel of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 49 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a head panel, the embodiment ofFIG. 49 having a wider width;
FIG. 50 is a perspective view of a foot panel of the patient support apparatus of FIG. One;
FIGS. 51A-P are a schematic of a wiring diagram of the electrical system of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 52 is a top plan view of a body support of the patient support surface ofFIG. 39;
FIG. 53 is a side plan view of the body support ofFIG. 52;
FIG. 54 is a perspective assembly view of the auxiliary wheel ofFIG. 32;
FIG. 55 is exploded assembly view of a push handle for use with the powered auxiliary wheel ofFIG. 12;
FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of strain gauge assembly of the push handle assembly ofFIG. 55;
FIG. 57 is an exploded assembly view of another push handle for use with the powered auxiliary wheel ofFIG. 12;
FIG. 58 is a side view of the patient support apparatus in a generally chair position, the patient support apparatus including a support structure for drainage bag;
FIG. 59 is a side view similar toFIG. 58, the drainage bag ofFIG. 59 in an improper orientation;
FIG. 60 is a perspective view of a patient support apparatus including ahospital bed10 and an adjacent chair, the chair having an exit sensor that communicates with thehospital bed10;
FIG. 61 is a plan view of a side rail of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 62 is a diagrammatic representation of a fixed panel for a side rail;
FIG. 63 is a diagrammatic representation of another embodiment of a fixed panel for a side rail;
FIG. 64 is a plan view of a side rail of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 showing a patient interface;
FIG. 65 is a diagrammatic representation of a fixed panel for a patient interface for the inside surface of a side rail;
FIG. 66 is a diagrammatic representation of a panel for a patient pendant that functions with the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 67 is a diagrammatic representation of the menu structure is presented on a graphical user interface;
FIG. 68 is a screenshot of a home screen of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIG. 69 is a screenshot of a of a home screen displayed on a graphical user interface when the patient support apparatus is on battery power;
FIG. 70 is a screenshot of a another embodiment of a home screen;
FIG. 71 is an illustration of the various functions available within the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIG. 72 is a plan view of the bottom of an upper layer of a body support of the mattress ofFIG. 40;
FIG. 73 is a plan view of the top of a bottom layer of the body support of the mattress ofFIG. 40;
FIG. 74 is an exploded assembly view of a side rail including a grip may be illuminated in response to conditions on the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 75A is a view of a side rail including a grip that may be illuminated, the grip and not illuminated;
FIG. 75B is a view similar toFIG. 75A, with the grip illuminated;
FIG. 76A is a partial view of a grip of a side rail that in includes an illuminated indicator;
FIG. 76B is a view similar toFIG. 76A,FIG. 76B illustrating the grip being illuminated;
FIG. 77 is a perspective view of a patient support apparatus that includes ports mounted in a foot section to provide a source of pressurized air for a sequential compression device;
FIG. 78 is a panel for a handle for the powered wheel assembly ofFIG. 12;
FIG. 79 is a diagrammatic view of the head end of the lower cover of the mattress ofFIG. 40;
FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly of a top cover of the mattress to the bottom cover of the mattress utilizing stiffening strips;
FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover ofFIG. 80 being secured to a zipper;
FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the top cover ofFIG. 80 being secured to a zipper;
FIG. 83 is a bottom perspective view of a foot section of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 84 is an exploded assembly view of a graphical user interface for use on a right head side rail of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 85 is an exploded assembly view of the graphical user interface for use on a left head side rail of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 86 is a top view of a body support of the mattress ofFIG. 40;
FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view of the body support ofFIG. 86;
FIG. 88 is an enlarged view of a portion of the view ofFIG. 87;
FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along lines89-89 ofFIG. 87;
FIG. 90 is in a large view of a portion of the body support ofFIG. 86;
FIG. 91 is a side view of a an alternative embodiment of a core for the mattress ofFIG. 83;
FIG. 92 is an enlarged view of a portion of the view ofFIG. 86
FIG. 93 is a top view of a top layer of the body support ofFIG. 86;
FIG. 94 is a top view of a bottom layer of the body support ofFIG. 86;
FIG. 95 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a bottom cover for the mattress ofFIG. 38;
FIG. 96 is a side view of a another embodiment of a core for the mattress ofFIG. 38;
FIG. 97 is a perspective view of a portion of a patient support apparatus including an indicator system for illuminating images on a surface spaced apart from the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 98 is a plan view of an indicator system positioned on the foot end of a foot deck section of a patient support apparatus;
FIG. 99 is a diagrammatic representation of the illumination system used in the indication system ofFIG. 97;
FIG. 100 is a diagrammatic representation taken from the side of a foot deck section of a patient support apparatus showing the projection of indicators by the system ofFIG. 97
FIG. 101 is a top view of a release mechanism for activating the quick release mechanism of a head actuator of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 102 is a perspective view from a head end on the patient's left of a patient support apparatus;
FIG. 103 is a detail view of a right siderail of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 illustrating that the pendant is held in place relative to the right siderail so that an input surface of the pendant is ergonomically positioned for a person supported on the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 104 is a detail view of the right siderail similar toFIG. 103 showing that the pendant slides upwards along a mount to be detached from the right siderail of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 105 is a top view of the patients support apparatus showing that the input surface of the pendant is coupled to the right siderail to be generally perpendicular to a line of sight of a patient supported on the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 106 is a perspective view from the head end on the patient's left of the right siderail of the patient support apparatus showing that the mount assembly holds the input surface of the pendant at a fixed incline angle relative to horizontal and that the pendant is slidable along the mount assembly;
FIG. 107 is a side view of the interior surface of the right siderail including the pendant similar toFIG. 106;
FIG. 108 is a top view of the right siderail including the pendant similar toFIG. 107;
FIG. 109 is a view from the head end of thehospital bed10 ofFIG. 102, showing the embodiment of pendant at a compound angle;
FIG. 110 is a detail view of the mount assembly showing that a mount is coupled to the siderail, and a mount receiver is coupled to the pendant to allow the pendant to move relative to the siderail along the mount;
FIG. 111 is a side view of the pendant when the input surface of the pendant is facing up;
FIG. 112 is top view of the pendant;
FIG. 113 is a bottom view of the pendant;
FIG. 114 is perspective view of another embodiment of the mount positioned on a patient interface to hold the pendant at an alternative position;
FIG. 115 is a perspective view of an another embodiment of a pendant which includes a spring actuated clamping mechanism operable to secure the pendant to a mount;
FIG. 116 is a perspective view similar toFIG. 115 with portions removed;
FIG. 117 is a perspective view of a portion of another embodiment of a right siderail including a mount that is suitable for use with the pendant shown inFIG. 114;
FIG. 118 is an enlarged view of yet another mount positioned on an interior surface of a left head siderail of a patient support apparatus;
FIG. 119 is a perspective view from a foot end on the patient's right of a patient support apparatus including an air box and a patient support structure supported on a frame;
FIG. 120 is a top plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1 including a first embodiment of the microclimate structure of the patient support structure ofFIG. 119 where a targeted therapeutic region extends from a head section through a seat section of the patient support structure, covering an entire upper surface of the microclimate structure;
FIG. 121 is a top plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 119 including a second embodiment of the microclimate structure of the patient support structure ofFIG. 119 with a targeted therapeutic region positioned in the seat section of the patient support structure;
FIG. 122 is a top plan view of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 119 including a third embodiment of the microclimate structure of the patient support structure ofFIG. 119 with a targeted therapeutic region shaped to correspond to a patient's pelvic and torso regions;
FIG. 123 is a perspective view of a portion of the patient support structure of the embodiment ofFIG. 122 showing a patient lying supine on the patient support structure;
FIG. 124 is a cross section taken along section lines124-124 ofFIG. 123 showing a first embodiment of the patients support structure including a microclimate structure where the middle layer of the microclimate structure includes a unitary three-dimensional material extending from the head end to a foot end of the patient support structure;
FIG. 125 is a cross section similar toFIG. 124 showing a second embodiment of the microclimate structure where the middle layer of the microclimate structure includes a middle layer comprising two sections of three-dimensional material;
FIG. 126 is a cross section similar toFIG. 124 taken along section lines showing an embodiment of the patient support structure encased by an outer ticking layer where an upper ticking covers the microclimate structure and a lower ticking encases a cushion layer;
FIG. 127 is a cross section similar toFIG. 8 showing a second embodiment of the patient support structure encased by the outer ticking layer where the upper ticking covers the microclimate structure having two three-dimensional material sections and the lower ticking encases the cushion layer;
FIG. 128 is a side view of the patient support apparatus with air being provided to the middle layer of the microclimate structure from the air box mounted to the foot end of the patient support apparatus and exhausts at the head end of the microclimate structure;
FIG. 129 is a side view of the patient support apparatus with air being provided to the middle layer of the microclimate structure from the air box integrated into the frame of the patient support apparatus;
FIG. 130 is a diagrammatic view of the patient support ofFIG. 1 showing that the frame includes a base and a deck, that a patient support structure include ticking, a foam shell, a plurality of inflatable support bladders, a valve box, a manifold, and the microclimate structure for conducting air along an interface of a patient with the patient support structure, and that the air box includes a controller, a blower, a heater, and an user interface;
FIG. 131 is a top view of the patient-support apparatus ofFIG. 1 with the mattress removed;
FIG. 132 is a block diagram of certain components of the patient-support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 133 is a diagrammatic end view of a turn assembly including a hinged support plate assembly, the turn assembly supporting the mattress of the patient-support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 134 is diagrammatic end view similar to the view shown inFIG. 133,FIG. 134 showing the turn assembly engaged to cause the mattress to be fully rotated to a first side;
FIG. 135 is diagrammatic end view similar to the view shown inFIG. 133,FIG. 135 showing the turn assembly engaged to cause the mattress to be partially rotated to a second side;
FIG. 136 is a perspective view of a hinged support plate assembly with one of the hinged support plates rotated about a rotation axis;
FIG. 137 is a partial exploded assembly view of a side rail for the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the side rail having a cavity for receiving a light strip that is operable to illuminate the grip of the side rail;
FIGS. 138A-138E are detailed views of the light strip ofFIG. 137;
FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the front of a foot panel which houses a system for operating a sequential compression device;
FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the back of the foot panel ofFIG. 139;
FIG. 141 is an enlarged perspective view of the foot panel ofFIG. 140 with portions removed;
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the foot panel ofFIG. 140 with portions removed;
FIG. 143 is an enlarged view of a portion of the foot panel ofFIG. 139;
FIGS. 144-180 are a series of screenshots of screens for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with the alerts portion of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIGS. 181-199 are a series of screenshots for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with a scale zeroing function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIGS. 200-228 are a series of screenshots for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with a scale weighing function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIGS. 229-247 are series of screenshots for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with the surface function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIGS. 248-267 are series of screenshots for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with the charting function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIGS. 268-285 are a series of screenshots for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with the Bluetooth® function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIGS. 286-352 are a series of screenshots for graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with the preferences function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIG. 353 is an example of a patient user interface for use with the overhead arm ofFIG. 102;
FIG. 354-376 are series of screenshots for a graphical user interface of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1, the screenshots associated with the SCD function of the menu structure ofFIG. 67;
FIG. 377A-377C is a flowchart directed to the operation of a weighing function of a scale system of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 378A-378C is a flowchart directed to the operation of a tare function of a scale system of the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 379 is a state diagram for the a powered wheel assembly for the patient support apparatus ofFIG. 1;
FIG. 380 is a flowchart of the data-gathering function of a controller of the powered wheel assembly;
FIG. 381A-381C is a flowchart of the operation of the controller for the powered wheel assembly utilizing inputs from other systems of the patient support apparatus of FIG. One to control operation of the powered wheel assembly;
FIG. 382 is a state diagram for the operation of the controller of the powered wheels assembly in response to an actuator deployment request;
FIG. 383 is a state diagram for the operation of the controller of the powered wheel assembly in response to an actuator retraction request;
FIG. 384 is a state diagram for the operation of the controller of the power wheel assembly in response to a power up request;
FIG. 385 is a relationship diagram identifying the relationships between parties partaking in an encryption protocol;
FIG. 386A-386B is a diagrammatic representation of the relationship between various entities taking part in an encryption protocol;
FIG. 387A-387B is a diagrammatic representation of the relationship between entities who are transferring certificate authority under an encryption protocol;
FIG. 388 is a front perspective view of a headboard;
FIG. 389 is a front elevation view of the headboard ofFIG. 388;
FIG. 390 is a rear elevation view of the headboard ofFIG. 388;
FIG. 391 is a top plan view of the headboard ofFIG. 388;
FIG. 392 is a bottom plan view of the headboard ofFIG. 388;
FIG. 393 is a first side elevation view of the headboard ofFIG. 388, with the opposite, second side elevation view being a mirror image of the first side elevation view;
FIG. 394 is a rear perspective view of the headboard ofFIG. 388;
FIG. 395 is a front perspective view of another embodiment of a headboard;
FIG. 396 is a front elevation view of the headboard ofFIG. 395;
FIG. 397 is a rear elevation view of the headboard ofFIG. 395;
FIG. 398 is a top plan view of the headboard ofFIG. 395;
FIG. 399 is a bottom plan view of the headboard ofFIG. 395;
FIG. 400 is a first side elevation view of the headboard ofFIG. 395, with the opposite, second side elevation view being a mirror image of the first side elevation view;
FIG. 401 is a rear perspective view of the headboard ofFIG. 395;
FIG. 402 is a first side perspective view of one embodiment of a headrail;
FIG. 403 is a first side elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 404 is a second side elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 405 is a top plan view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 406 is a bottom plan view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 407 is a rear elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 408 is a front elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 409 is a second side perspective view of the headrail ofFIG. 402;
FIG. 410 is a first side perspective view of another embodiment of the headrail;
FIG. 411 is a first side elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 412 is a second side elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 413 is a top plan view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 414 is a bottom plan view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 415 is a rear elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 416 is a front elevation view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 417 is a second side perspective view of the headrail ofFIG. 410;
FIG. 418 is a first side perspective view of one embodiment of a footrail;
FIG. 419 is a first side elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 420 is a second side elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 421 is a top plan view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 422 is a bottom plan view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 423 is a front elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 424 is a rear elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 425 is a second side perspective view of the footrail ofFIG. 418;
FIG. 426 is a first side perspective view of another embodiment of the footrail;
FIG. 427 is a first side elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 428 is a second side elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 429 is a top plan view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 430 is a bottom plan view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 431 is a front elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 432 is a rear elevation view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 433 is a second side perspective view of the footrail ofFIG. 426;
FIG. 434 is a front perspective view of a footboard;
FIG. 435 is a front elevation view of the footboard ofFIG. 434;
FIG. 436 is a rear elevation view of the footboard ofFIG. 434;
FIG. 437 is a top plan view of the footboard ofFIG. 434;
FIG. 438 is a bottom plan view of the footboard ofFIG. 434;
FIG. 439 is a first side elevation view of the footboard ofFIG. 434, with the opposite, second side elevation view being a mirror image of the first side elevation view; and
FIG. 440 is a rear perspective view of the footboard ofFIG. 434.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Referring toFIGS. 1-9, apatient support apparatus10 is illustratively embodied as ahospital bed10. The views shown inFIGS. 1-3 are generally taken from a position that is oriented at the left side, foot end of thehospital bed10. For purposes of orientation, the discussion of thehospital bed10 will be based on the orientation of a patient supported on thehospital bed10 in a supine position. Thus, thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10 refers to the end nearest the patient's feet when the patient is supported on thehospital bed10 in the supine position. Thehospital bed10 has ahead end14 opposite thefoot end12. Aleft side16 refers to the patient's left when the patient is lying in thehospital bed10 in a supine position. Theright side18 refers to the patient's right. When reference is made to the longitudinal length of thehospital bed10, it refers a direction that is represented by the lines that generally extend between thehead end14 andfoot end12 of thehospital bed10. Similarly, lateral width of thehospital bed10 refers to a direction that is represented by the lines that generally extend between theleft side16 andright side18.
Thehospital bed10 includes abase frame20 which supports alift system22. Thelift system22 engages the base and anupper frame24 such that thelift system22 moves theupper frame24 vertically relative to thebase frame20. Thelift system22 includes ahead end linkage27 and afoot end linkage29. Each of thelinkages27 and29 are independently operable and may be operated to cause thehospital bed10 to move into a tilt position which is when thehead end14 of theupper frame24 is positioned lower than thefoot end12 of theupper frame24. Thehospital bed10 may also be moved to a reverse tilt position with thefoot end12 of theupper frame24 is positioned lower than thehead end14 of theupper frame24.
Theupper frame24 supports aload frame26. Theload frame26 supports ahead deck28 which is movable relative to theload frame26. Theload frame26 also supports an articulatedseat deck30, also movable relative to theload frame26 and afixed seat deck32. Also supported from theload frame26 is afoot deck34 that is articulated and moveable relative to theload frame26. Thefoot deck34 in the illustrative embodiment ofFIGS. 1-9, provides for powered pivoting of thefoot deck34 and manual extension and retraction of thefoot deck34 to vary the length of thefoot deck34. In other embodiments, powered pivoting of thefoot deck34 may be omitted and the related movement may be caused manually, or follow movement of the articulatedseat deck30. In addition, in some embodiments, extension and retraction of thefoot deck34 may be powered by an actuator.
Thefoot deck34 includes afirst portion36 and asecond portion38, which moves relative to thefirst portion36 to vary the size of thefoot deck34. Thesecond portion38 moves generally longitudinally relative to thefirst portion36 to vary the longitudinal length of thefoot deck34 and, thereby, the longitudinal length of thehospital bed10.
Afoot panel40 is supported from thesecond portion38 and extends vertically from anupper surface42 of thesecond portion38 to form a barrier at thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10. Ahead panel44 is positioned on anupright structure46 of thebase frame20 and extends vertically to form a barrier at thehead end14 of thehospital bed10. Aleft head siderail48 is supported from thehead deck28 and is moveable between a raised position shown inFIG. 1 and a lowered position shown inFIG. 7. Aright head siderail50 is also moveable between the raised position ofFIG. 1 and lowered position similar to that of theleft head siderail48 inFIG. 7. As shown inFIG. 1, in the raised position, the siderails48 and50 extend above an upper surface52 of the respective decks of thehospital bed10 when the siderails48 and50 are in a raised position. In a lowered position, such as the position ofleft head siderail48 inFIG. 7, which positions an upper edge56 of theleft head siderail48 below the upper surface52.
Thehospital bed10 also includes aleft foot siderail58 and aright foot siderail60, each of which is supported directly from theload frame26. Each of thesiderails48,50,58, and60 are operable to be lowered to a position below the upper surface52. It should be noted that when thehead deck28 is moved, the head siderails48 and50 move with thehead deck28 so that they maintain their relative position to the patient. This is because both of the head siderails48 and50 are supported by thehead deck28.
Referring to theleft head siderail48, auser interface62 includes ahard panel64 and agraphical user interface66. Theuser interface62 will be discussed in further detail below, but it should be understood that thehard panel64 provides indications to a user regarding the status of certain functions of thehospital bed10 as well as providing a standard set of fixed input devices. Thegraphical user interface66 includes a touchscreen display that provides information to a user as well as allowing for flexible, menu driven, operation of certain functions of thehospital bed10. Theright head siderail50 also includes auser interface68 which includes ahard panel70. In other embodiments, theright head siderail50 may include a second graphical user interface duplicative of thegraphical user interface66.
Thehospital bed10 may further include an optional patient pendant72, shown inFIGS. 46A-46C, which may be used by a patient to control certain functions of thehospital bed10. Additional information is provided to a caregiver through anoptional indicator panel74 which displays the status of various conditions of thehospital bed10 graphically to a caregiver at thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10. The location of theindicator panel74 makes the statuses of the conditions easily discernable from a distance, such that a caregiver may quickly ascertain the statuses from the hallway or the door of a patient's room. As will be discussed below, additional indication of the statuses may be projected on the floor under thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10, providing larger images on the floor, making the images more easily discerned by a caregiver. Similarly, anilluminated grip76 is positioned on theleft head siderail48, the illuminatedgrip76 being selectively illuminated in different colors to provide an indication of the status of one or more functions of thehospital bed10 to a caregiver. Similarly, theright head siderail50 also includes an illuminatedgrip78, which is duplicative of the illuminatedgrip76.
As shown inFIGS. 1-9, thehospital bed10 includes apatient helper80, which is supported from the base frame20 (seeFIGS. 5-7). Thepatient helper80 includes acurved arm82 that is fixed to thebase frame20 with asupport arm84 extending from thecurved arm82. Thesupport arm84 is formed to include a hexagonal cross-section which provides a resistance to rotation of aclamp86 when theclamp86 is secured to thesupport arm84. Theclamp86 supports achain88 which depends vertically from theclamp86. Thechain88 supports agrip90 which is graspable by a patient positioned in a supine position on thehospital bed10 so that the patient may use thepatient helper80 to reposition themselves in thehospital bed10.
Thehospital bed10 also includes anauxiliary outlet110 positioned at afoot end12 of thebase frame20. Theauxiliary outlet110 provides a separate circuit, independent of the electrical system of thehospital bed10, which may be used to power accessory equipment positioned at thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10.
In some embodiments, thehospital bed10 also includes a powered drive wheel assembly92 (shown inFIG. 12) that is positioned on thebase frame20 near the central longitudinal and lateral axes of thebase frame20. The powereddrive wheel assembly92 includes amotor assembly330 that powers a drive wheel214 (seeFIG. 12). Thedrive wheel214 is operable, under the control of a user, such as a caregiver, for example, to provide assistance to the user in transporting thehospital bed10 over a floor. The powereddrive wheel assembly92 is operated by user through auser interface382 positioned at thehead end14 of thehospital bed10. Theuser interface382 includes twohandles394,396 which are engaged by a user and which include inputs that allow the user operate the powereddrive wheel assembly92.
Thehospital bed10 is configured to support a patient support surface1700 (seeFIG. 3). The patient support surface of the illustrative embodiment ofFIG. 3 is a non-powered mattress comprising a core of foam components as shown inFIG. 37. Thehospital bed10 may also be used in conjunction with apatient support surface1800 shown inFIG. 39 which includes a number of air cells that employ self-adjusting technology to distribute a patient's weight or with a pneumaticpatient support surface1900 which utilizes a pressurized air to operate thepatient support surface1900 to support the patient. Each of thepatient support surfaces1700,1800, and1900 are discussed in further detail below.
The control system400 of thehospital bed10 is configured to interact with several sub-systems and auxiliary devices, permitting the user of thehospital bed10 to control or interact with the subsystems through thegraphical user interface66. For example, thegraphical user interface66 allows a user to control operation of the pneumaticpatient support surface1900. A user may also interact with theindicator panel74 and illuminatedgrips76 and78 to define the conditions that cause each of those devices to provide indications to a user. Thehospital bed10 also includes a scale system with thegraphical user interface66 providing the interface for the user to the operation of the scale system and associated operations and alerts. Still further, thehospital bed10 may include a patient position monitoring function that is operated from thegraphical user interface66. Other subsystems and accessories that may be interfaced with thegraphical user interface66 include a chair exit monitoring system, a sequential compression device, a radio frequency based authentication system for identifying appropriate caregivers, a charting function that allows a user to chart certain information to the patient's electronic medical record from thegraphical user interface66. In addition, thehospital bed10 may optionally be configured with an incontinence detection system which provides an alert if the patient has an incontinent event. Each of these functions and accessories may employ thegraphical user interface66 to configure and monitor the various subsystems and accessories. Utilization of thegraphical user interface66 permits optional functions and accessories to be added without the need for reconfiguring any hard keys on thehospital bed10.
For example, referring now toFIG. 60, thepatient support apparatus10 may be configured to be part of a system which includes thepatient support apparatus10 and adetector4382 configured to be positioned on achair4384 to be used by a patient. Thedetector4382 is operable to communicate wirelessly with thepatient support apparatus10 such that thedetector4382 is integrated with the patient position monitoring system of thepatient support apparatus10. In some embodiments, when the patient sits on thedetector4382, the system automatically arms to monitor for an egress from thechair4384 by the patient. If an egress condition is detected, thedetector4382 indicates that condition to thepatient support apparatus10 which then alerts a caregiver via the patient position monitoring system of thepatient support apparatus10. For example, as shown inFIG. 158, a caregiver may use the graphical user interface to set the patient position monitoring system between one of three detection settings: detecting when a patient changes position; detecting when the patient moves toward the edge of thepatient support apparatus10; or detecting when the patient has left the patient support apparatus. The patient position monitoring system may be programmed with a voice prompt or other auditory alarm or alert encouraging the patient to stay in thepatient support apparatus10 until assistance arrives. In some embodiments, the voice prompt will in courage the patient to “please stay inhospital bed10.” Further details of the operation of the patient position monitoring system and chair exit alarms is shown inFIGS. 144-180.
As shown inFIG. 11, thebase frame20 includes a pair of laterally spacedlongitudinal rails140 and142 with therail140 being positioned on theleft side16 of thebase frame20 and therail142 being positioned on theright side18 of thebase frame20. Alateral channel144 is positioned at thefoot end12 of thebase frame20 and connects the tworails140 and142. A secondlateral channel146 is positioned at thehead end14 of therails140 and142 connects to both therails140 and142. Four caster mounts148 are positioned in thechannels144 and146 and secured by abolt150 andnut152 as suggested inFIG. 11. Eachchannel144 and146 overlies a respective lateralbrake shaft assembly154 and155 which spans thechannels144 and146 to interconnect the respective caster mounts148. The lateralbrake shaft assemblies154 and155 each includes a pair ofreceivers156 secured to each end of the respective lateralbrake shaft assembly154,155 with thereceivers156 having a hexagonal shaped internal feature. In addition, at the end of each of the lateralbrake shaft assemblies154,155 positioned at theleft side12 of thebase frame20, a floatinghub158 is positioned to be aligned with the hexagonal shaped internal feature of thereceivers156 positioned on that side. The floatinghub158 includes a through-hole positioned in an offset lobe of the floatinghub158, the through-hole configured to receive apin160. Thebase frame20 further includes alongitudinal brake link162. Thelongitudinal brake link162 is formed to include a yoke164 at each end, the yokes164 receiving the offset lobe of the floatinghub158 so that thepin160 engages both thelongitudinal brake link162 and the offset lobe of the floatinghub158. Eachpin160 is retained by a pair ofcaps166 which are forced onto the respective ends of thepins160 and are retained with an interference fit.
In operation, the rotation of either of thebrake shaft assemblies154 or155 is transferred to the other by the motion of the floatinghub158 which transfers the motion to thelongitudinal brake link162, which acts on the other of the floatinghubs158 to rotate the other of thebrake shaft assemblies154 or155. Thebrake shaft assemblies154 and155 are manually manipulated by the operation of one of fourpedal assemblies170,172,174, and176. Thepedal assembly170 is positioned at the left head end of thebase frame20. Thepedal assembly170 includes aninput arm178 which is secured to ashaft180 having a hex shaped cross-section. Theshaft180 is passed through areceiver182 of acaster184 and is received in the hexagonal shaped internal features of thereceiver156 of floatinghub158 and is secured in place by aclamp screw185. Because thepedal assembly170 is keyed to thebrake shaft assembly155 positioned at thehead end14 of thehospital bed10, movement of thepedal assembly170 is transferred to thebrake shaft assembly155 and, through the floatinghub158, to thelongitudinal brake link162.
Theinput arm178 is secured to theshaft180 and is configured to rotate about anaxis186. Theinput arm178 has afirst leg190 and asecond leg192. Apad assembly194 is secured over thefirst leg190 and secured with a snap-fit. Anotherpad assembly196 is secured over thesecond leg192 and secured with a snap-fit. Thepad assemblies194 and196 are configured to be manually acted upon by a user, with the user's foot, for example, to cause rotation of theinput arm178 about theaxis186 to cause rotation of theshaft180. In the embodiment ofpedal assembly170, thepad assembly194 is illustratively an orange color and corresponds to the motion aboutshaft180 that causes braking of thecaster184 and is transferred to the other threecasters198,200, and202 through thelongitudinal brake link162 and thebrake shaft assemblies154 and155 to cause braking of all four of thecasters184,198,200, and202. Thepad assembly196 is illustratively a green color and corresponds to the motion aboutshaft180 that causescasters200 and202 to be placed in a steer mode. In the illustrative embodiment, the twofoot end casters200 and202 are capable of being placed in steer mode which is a mode in which rotation of thecasters200 and202 about their relative stems204 and206 is precluded and thecasters200 and202 are placed in a trailing mode with the wheels208 and210 of therespective casters200 and202 trailing behind the stems204 and206 as shown inFIG. 11. In this trailing configuration, thehospital bed10 tracks along a straight path which eases the movement of thehospital bed10 by a user. In other embodiments, only one of thecasters200 and202 may be placed in steer mode. In still other embodiments, none of thecasters184,198,200, or202 may be placed in steer mode and thehospital bed10 may include anauxiliary wheel assembly212 positioned at the center of the base as shown inFIG. 32. As will be discussed in further detail below, theauxiliary wheel assembly212 is continuously in contact with the ground and provides a mechanism for tracking thehospital bed10 in a straight line. In still other embodiments, thehospital bed10 may include a poweredauxiliary wheel214, shown inFIG. 12, which is deployed when thepad assembly196 is activated and is selectively activated to provide a driving force to drive thehospital bed10 over the floor as will be discussed in further detail below.
Suitable casters for this application include part number 2046UAP125R36-32535 from Tente for the brake/steer functionality.
Thepedal assembly172 is similar topedal assembly170, with the principal difference being that thepad assembly194 ofpedal assembly172 is positioned on thesecond leg192 of theinput arm178 ofpedal assembly172 and thepad assembly196 is positioned on thefirst leg190 of theinput arm178. This difference is consistent with the movement of thepedal assembly170 about theaxis186. The brake mode requires movement in a first direction aboutaxis186 and the steer mode requires movement in a second direction, opposite the first direction. Thus, bothpad assemblies194 are at thehead end14 of thehospital bed10 and thepad assemblies196 are inboard from thepad assemblies194. The assembly of thepedal assembly172 to thecaster198 is otherwise similar to the arrangement ofpedal assembly170 andcaster184.
Thepedal assembly174 has an input arm216 with a single leg218. Apad assembly194 is positioned on the single leg218 and the single leg218 is positioned to effect rotation of ashaft220 of thepedal assembly174 about an axis222 that corresponds to rotation aboutaxis186 when the brake function is activated. Theshaft220 is positioned in a receiver224 ofcaster200 and operates to activate the brake function in a manner similar to the action ofpedal170. Theshaft220 engages the floatinghub158 in a manner similar to that ofshaft180 described above.
Thepedal assembly176 has an input arm226 with asingle leg228. Apad assembly194 is positioned on thesingle leg228 and thesingle leg228 is positioned to effect rotation of a shaft230 of thepedal assembly176 about the axis222. The shaft230 is positioned in a receiver232 ofcaster202 and operates to activate the brake function in a manner similar to the action ofpedal174. In effect,pedal assemblies174 and176 lack the ability to place thehospital bed10 into a steer mode.
In some embodiments, thepedal assemblies174 and176 are omitted and replaced withactuators234 and236, respectively, shown in phantom inFIG. 11. Theactuators234 and236 are of similar construction and have ashaft238 with a hexagonal cross section. Theactuators234 and236 are secured to the floatinghubs158 as described above and operate to transfer motion from thelongitudinal brake link162 to thecasters200 and202 when thepedal assemblies170 or172 are activated. This arrangement omits thepedal assemblies174 and176 to reduce cost and eliminate the potential for unintended actuation of thepedal assemblies174 and176, which are positioned near thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10 and more accessible for actuation.
Thepedal assemblies170,172,174, and176 cooperate with thelongitudinal brake link162 and the mechanisms of thecasters184,198,200, and202 and thebrake shaft assemblies154,155 to operate as a brake-steer mechanism240. As will be described in further detail below, thehospital bed10 includes a control system400 which utilizes various inputs from sensors on thehospital bed10 and from external sources to process the sensor information and control outputs on thehospital bed10 as well as providing information external systems. There are twosensors242 and244 that are associated with the brake-steer mechanism240 and provide information relative to the mode of the brake-steer mechanism240 to the control system400. Thebrake shaft assembly154 includes anactuator246 which moves with thebrake shaft assembly154 when it is rotated. When the brake-steer mechanism240 is placed in brake mode, theactuator246 engages the sensor244 so that the sensor244 is activated to provide an indication to the control system400 that the brake-steer mechanism240 is in the brake mode. Rotation about the axis in the opposite direction when the brake-steer mechanism240 is placed in the steer mode causes theactuator246 to engage thesensor242 to provide an indication to the control system400 that the brake-steer mechanism240 is in steer mode. Thesensors242 and244 are each a limit switch with an activation arm that is engaged by theactuator246 to provide the signal to the control system400. Thesensors242 and244 are each secured to thelateral channel144 by a pair ofscrews248 and electrically connected to the control system400 as will be described in further detail below.
Thehospital bed10 includes a pair ofcovers450 and452 which each include an opening454 to allow the shaft of thepedal assemblies174,176 to pass through the opening454. When thepedal assemblies174,176 are omitted, thecovers450,452 are omitted and replaced with covers that do not include the openings454. Referring toFIG. 1, acover456 is positioned at the head end of thebase frame20 and is a unitary structure which overlies thecross channel146 and covers the top of thecasters184,198 while also spanning the space between thelongitudinal rails140,142. Thecover456 partially overlies another cover458 which spans between twocurved uprights460 and462. Thecover456 encloses aspace464 that's bounded by apanel466 at thehead end14 of thebase frame20. Yet anothercover468 seen inFIG. 5 spans between thecurved uprights460,462 to provide a shroud there between.Base frame20 also includes a pair of snap fit covers468,468 that are inserted into the ends of thelongitudinal rails140,142 as shown inFIG. 11.
Thelift system22 is supported on thebase frame20 and supports theupper frame24. Thelift system22 includes anactuator250 which extends and retracts to cause thefoot end12 of theupper frame24 to be raised and lowered relative to thebase frame20. Thelift system22 includes anotheractuator252 which extends and retracts to cause thehead end14 of theupper frame24 to be raised and lowered relative to thebase frame20. Theactuators250 and252 provide output to cause actuation of theupper frame24 relative to thebase frame20 and are electrically connected to the control system400 such that the control system400 provides electrical signals to theactuators250 and252 to cause the movement of theupper frame24 relative to thebase frame20. Theactuators250 and250 to include internal Hall-effect sensors (not shown) which are electrically connected to the control system400 and used by the control system400 to determine the position of theactuators250 and252, and thereby, the position of theupper frame24 relative to thebase frame20 as will be discussed in further detail below. One suitable actuator for this application is a Model TA24 actuator available from TiMOTION Technology of Taiwan City, Taiwan.
Theupper frame24 includes alongitudinal rail254 positioned on theleft side16 of theupper frame24 and alongitudinal rail256 positioned on theright side18 of theupper frame24. Acrossmember258 is positioned at thehead end14 of the intermediate frame and secured to thelongitudinal rails254 and256. Acrossmember260 is positioned at thefoot end12 of theupper frame24 and secured to thelongitudinal rails254 and256.
Theupper frame24 further includes across rail262 which is a lateral member that spans a distance between thelongitudinal rails254 and256. Thecross rail262 includes ayoke264 with anend266 of theactuator250 being engaged with theyoke264 and secured with a pin269 such that theend266 of theactuator250 is secured to theupper frame24. Theactuator250 includes abody268 and arod270 that extends and retracts relative to thebody268. Arod end272 is positioned at a distal end of therod270 such that the distance between theend266 and therod end272 very as therod270 is extended and retracted relative to thebody268. The actuator250 acts on alift arm assembly274 such that thelift arm assembly274 rotates about anaxis276 and caused movement of theupper frame24 relative to thebase frame20. Thelift arm274 includes ayoke278 to which therod272 is secured by apin280. Thepin280 is offset from theaxis276 so that extension and retraction of theactuator250 causes a moment about theaxis276. Theyoke278 is secured to atorque tube282 of thelift arm274 such that the moment created by the extension retraction of theactuator250 induces rotation of thetorque tube282 about theaxis276. Thelift arm assembly274 includes a pair ofarms284 and286 which are secured to thetorque tube282 so that rotation of thetorque tube282 causes movement of thearms284,286. Thelift arm assembly274 also includes ashaft288 which is secured to thearms284 and286 with theshaft288 being offset from thetorque tube282 by thearms284 and286 such that rotation of thetorque tube282 about theaxis276 causes orbiting of theshaft288 about theaxis276. Thelift system22 is supported on thebase frame20 by engagement of afirst slide block290 being positioned in achannel292 which is secured to and supported on thelongitudinal rail140 of thebase frame20. Asecond slide block290 engages achannel294 which is secured to thelongitudinal rail142 of thebase frame20. Each end of theshaft288 of thelift arm274 is received in one of the slide blocks290 and is free to rotate about anaxis296 of theshaft288.
Each end of thetorque tube282 is received in arespective bearing298. Theupper frame24 includes a pair of bearingreceivers300 positioned on the underside of therails254 and256, respectively. The bearingreceivers300 are supported on thebearings298 with thebearings298 being secured to each of the bearingreceivers300 by a pair offasteners302 to so that theupper frame24 is supported on thetorque tube282 through thebearings298 with the bearingreceivers300 securing thebearings298 relative to theupper frame24. Rotation of thetorque tube282 by the action of theactuator250 induces movement of theshaft288 and slide blocks290,290 in therespective channels292 and294 so that thelift arm274 moves between a position where thearms284 and286 are generally parallel to thelongitudinal rails140 and142 of thebase frame20 and a position where thearms284 and286 are in a generally vertical orientation like that shown inFIG. 11. In this way, extension and retraction ofactuator250 changes the elevation of thefoot end12 of theupper frame24 relative to thebase frame20.
The structure used to raise and lower thehead end14 of theupper frame24 relative to thebase frame20 is the same as that with regard to thefoot end12 of theupper frame24. Theupper frame24 includes another cross rail304 that includes ayoke306 which receives and supports theend266 of theactuator252. Theactuator252 includes all of the structural components ofactuator250. Therod end272 of theactuator252 engages theyoke278 of a secondlift arm assembly274. Thetorque tube282 of the secondlift arm assembly274 rotates about anaxis306 to cause rotation of theshaft288 of the secondlift arm assembly274 about anaxis308. The slide blocks290 of the head endlift arm assembly274 are received inchannels310 and312 which are secured to thelongitudinal rails140 and142, respectively, of thebase frame20. Extension and retraction of theactuator252 causes rotation of thetorque tube282 about theaxis306 which, thereby, causes movement of thearms286 and284 of thelift arm assembly274 to move between a horizontal position generally parallel to thelongitudinal rails140 and142 and the generally vertical position shown inFIG. 11. Thus, thehead end actuator252 is operable to move thehead end14 of theupper frame24 vertically relative to thebase frame20.
To prevent thelift system22 from being moved longitudinally relative to thebase frame20, thelift arm274 positioned at thefoot end12 is secured to thebase frame20 through a pair of ground links314. The ground links314 are secured at the midpoint of thearms284 and286 withfasteners316 that are secured bynuts318 with awasher320 providing for rotation of the ground links314 relative to thebolt316. Thelongitudinal rails140 and142 of thebase frame20 haverespective flanges323 and324 secured thereto. The ground links314 are each secured to theflanges232 and324 by abolt316 and anut318 with awasher320 permitting the ground links314,314 to rotate relative to theflanges323 and324. The ground links314,314 serve to ground of the footend lift arm274 to thebase frame20 to prevent the sliding of the slide blocks290 relative to thebase frame20, without extension and retraction of therespective actuators250 and252.
As shown inFIG. 12, with further detail provided inFIGS. 34, 35, and 55-57 embodiments of thehospital bed10 may include a powereddrive wheel assembly92 which supports and drives the poweredauxiliary wheel214. The powereddrive wheel assembly92 includes laterally spacedchannels325 and326 which overlie thelongitudinal rails140 and142 of thebase frame20, respectively. Thechannels325 and326 are interconnected by acrossbeam328 to form aframe329 of the powereddrive wheel assembly92. The poweredauxiliary wheel214 is driven by amotor assembly330 which includes atransmission332 that transmits the rotation of themotor assembly330 to drive thewheel214. Anactuator334 is operable to raise and lower theauxiliary wheel214 relative to theframe329 of the powereddrive wheel assembly92. A suitable motor is an Electro-Craft MP36-WL-018V24-400. A suitable actuator is a LA40 from Linak USA, Inc. Theactuator334 is secured to thecrossbeam328 with anend341 of theactuator334 being secured to ayoke338 of thecrossbeam328 by apin336. Thepin336 permits rotation of theactuator334 relative to theyoke338. Theactuator334 includes abody340 and arod342 with arod end344 of theactuator334 secured to ayoke346 that is secured to atorque tube348 by apin350. Thetorque tube348 is supported by theframe329 on a pair ofbushings343,343 and rotatable about anaxis352 with the rotation of the torque tube398 being caused by the extension and retraction of therod342 relative to thebody340.
Rotation of thetorque tube348 is transferred to ashaft354 which is positioned under thecrossbeam328 and rotatable relative to theframe329 on a pair ofbearings343,343. Thetorque tube348 is secured to ayoke structure356 that includes threeflanges358 which move with thetorque tube348 when it rotates about theaxis352. A pair of gas springs360,360 is secured to theyoke structure356 by apin366. The gas springs360 and362 each include abody368 and arod370 with arod end372 of eachgas spring360 and362 secured to arespective flange374 and376 coupled to theshaft354. Theshaft354 supports aplatform378 on which themotor assembly330 is mounted. Theplatform378 rotates about theshaft354. Because theauxiliary wheel214 is supported from themotor assembly330, movement of theplatform378 andmotor assembly330 causes movement of theauxiliary wheel214 from a retracted position shown inFIG. 12 to a deployed position, wherein theauxiliary wheel214 engages the floor.
When theauxiliary wheel214 is deployed to engage the floor, the gas springs360 and362 provide resilient down pressure to maintain theauxiliary wheel214 in engagement with the floor. If theauxiliary wheel214 encounters an obstacle in the floor, such as a threshold, the force of the engagement of theauxiliary wheel214 with the obstruction is transferred through theplatform378 to theshaft354 and therods370,370 of the gas springs360 and362. The resilience of the gas springs360 and362 permit therods370,370 to contract into thebodies368,368 of the respective gas springs360 and362. In this way, the gas springs360 and360 to operate as shock absorbers for the powereddrive wheel assembly92. Theframe329 of the powereddrive wheel assembly92 is secured to thebase frame20 by eightscrews380. Ashroud323 is positioned over theframe329 and secured to thecrossbeam328 by a fastener327.
The powereddrive wheel assembly92 includes acontrol box382 which encloses acircuit board assembly384 which provides control for the powereddrive wheel assembly92 by operating theactuator334 and amotor speed controller385. Thecircuit board assembly384 and themotor controller385 are housed in thecontrol box382 which includes a base381 and a cover383. A suitable motor controller is A Dynamic DS120. The components of thecontrol box382 are secured by a number ofscrews387. Thecircuit board assembly384 receives power from a pair ofbatteries386 that are supported from thebase frame20 and secured by abracket388 and fourfasteners390.
A user interface392 for the powereddrive wheel assembly92 is positioned at thehead end14 of thebase frame20 and includes a pair of push handles394 and396 as shown inFIGS. 12 and 55-57. The push handles394 and396 are supported from the base frame inrespective mount tubes402 and404. The push handle394 includes abase406 and a curvedupper arm408 that may be folded down relative to the base406 when the push handle394 is not in use. The curvedupper arm408 includes aslot410 is secured to thebase406 by apin412 defining anaxis414. The uppercurved arm408 is movable relative to thepin412 with an end of thecurved arm408 being received in an inner diameter of the base406 when it is in a use position shown inFIG. 12. To move the push handle394 to a stowed position, theupper arm408 is moved vertically upwardly relative to thebase406 and rotated about theaxis414 to rotate down to the stowed position with relief in the base406 being provided by aslot416 formed in thebase406.
The push handle396 includes abase418 and a curvedupper arm420. The curvedupper arm420 includes aslot422 which engages a pin424 secured to the base418 with the pin424 defining anaxis426. The push handle396 operates in a manner similar to the push handle394 and a stowed by lifting the curvedupper arm420 out of an internal diameter of thebase418 and pivoting the uppercurved arm420 about theaxis426 to a stowed position.
The push handle396 includes agrip428 and aswitch430 which is an electrical communication with thecontroller384. Theswitch430 is configured to be actuated by the hand of the user when they grip onto thegrip428 of thepush handle396. The push handle394 includes agrip432 and aswitch434 that is also configured to be actuated by the hand of a user when they grip onto thegrip432 of thepush handle394. Theswitch430 is engaged with aswitch assembly1472 that is positioned in an upper portion1474 of thecurved arm420 as suggested inFIG. 55. Similarly, theswitch434 is engaged with aswitch assembly1476 that is positioned in anupper portion1478 of thecurved arm408 as shown inFIG. 57. In addition, theuser interface panel436 supported on the push handle394 includes adisplay101 as shown inFIG. 78. Thedisplay101 includes instructions for a user to activate the powereddrive wheel assembly92. To operate the powered wheel assembly92 a user must first unplug thehospital bed10 from the wall and engage the steer function as indicated at102. The user must then lower thehospital bed10 to a transport height as indicated at104. Finally, a user must engage both of the enable switches430 and434 as indicated at106. Once these conditions are met, thepowered wheel assembly92 is operational. A status of the level of charge in thebatteries386 is provided by anindicator108.
When the push handles396 and394 are in a use position such as that shown inFIG. 12, the curvedupper arms408 and420 engage respectivestrain gauge assemblies1468,1470 positioned in thebases418 and406 such that when a user applies pressure to the push handles394 and396, thestrain gauges1468,1470 provide a signal to thecontroller384 indicative of the force being applied. Further discussion of the operation of the powereddrive wheel assembly92 and thecontroller384 is provided below with reference to the control system400 of thehospital bed10.
The signals from theswitch assembly1476 anduser interface panel436 are transferred through acable1480 that is routed through thecurved arm408 and connected to aconnector1484 of acable1482 that is routed through thestrain gauge assembly1468 as shown inFIG. 56. Acable1482 of push handle396 is routed through thecurved arm420 and connects to thecable1482 of thestrain gauge assembly1470 in a similar manner.
As shown inFIG. 20, theload frame26 is supported from theupper frame24 through fourload cells522,524,526, and528 each of which is secured to the upper frame by a pair offasteners530,530. Eachload cell522,524,526,528 is formed to include a threaded receiver532 into which aball stud534 is received so that theball stud534 is cantilevered from abody536 of therespective load cells522,524,526, and528 as shown with respect to loadcell522. Referring now again toFIG. 11, thecross members258 and260 of theupper frame24 are formed to include receivers539 through which theball studs534 are positioned and supported on aload block540 positioned in each end of eachcrossmember258 and260 and secured withfasteners542. The ball ends545 of eachball stud534 are supported on the load blocks543 point contact. All of the weight of theload frame26 and components supported by theload frame26 discussed below are supported on theball studs534 such that theload cells522,524,526, and528 since the load supported by theload frame26 and are operable to provide a signal representative of that load to the control system400 as will be discussed in further detail below.
Theload frame26 includes a pair oflongitudinal rails538 and540 with thelongitudinal rail538 being positioned on theleft side16 of theload frame26 and thelongitudinal rail540 being positioned on theright side18. Across beam542 is positioned between therails538 and540 and positioned generally at thehead end14 of theload frame26. Asecond crossbeam544 is secured to therails538 and540 and positioned generally at thefoot end12 of theload frame26. Theload frame26 includes a number offlanges546,548,550, and552. The cross beams542 and544 are welded to therails538 and540. Theflanges546,548,550, and552 are welded to both arespective crossbeam542 or544 and arespective rail538 or540. The load beams522,524,526, and528 are each secured to one of therespective flanges546,548,550, or552.
Theload frame26 supports apan560 to which a main circuit board (not shown inFIG. 20) is secured. In addition, theload frame26 includes three drainage bag hooks558 positioned on the outside of eachrail538 and540. The location of the drainage bag hooks558 on theload frame26 provides a location to support various Foley bag or other structures which collect waste products from a patient on theload frame26 provide an accurate scale reading until the waste products are removed so that a caregiver is capable of determining the weight removed from theload frame26 at the time that the waste receptacle is removed or emptied. Theload frame26 includes additional structures for supporting other components of thehospital bed10 for movement relative to theload frame26.
Theload frame26 supports thehead deck28 for movement relative to theload frame26.
The articulatedseat deck30 is pivotably coupled to theload frame26 by a pair ofpins562,562 which secure laterally spacedrails564 and566 of the articulated seat deck to respective flanges is568 and570 as suggested byFIG. 20. Abearing572 is positioned in the head end of eachrail564 and566 with thru-holes574 and576 formed in therails564 and566 respectively. Thepins562 pass through the respective thru-holes574 and576 thebearings572,572 and are secured by retainingclips578. A pair ofwashers580 are used at each connection between the respective flanges ofyokes568 and570 and thepins562 and retainingclips578. Thepins562 cooperate to define apivot axis582 about which the articulatedseat deck30 pivots.
Pivoting of the articulatedseat deck30 is caused by anactuator584 which has abody586, anextendable rod588, arod end590, and anend592. Theend592 is secured to aclevis594 positioned on thecrossmember596. Theend592 is secured to theclevis594 by apin598 secured with a retainingclip600. Therod588 of theactuator584 extends from thebody586 to change the distance between therod end590 and theend592 as the actuator584 changes length. Therod end590 is received in aclevis602 which is secured to a crossmember604 of the articulatedseat deck30. Therod end590 is secured by apin598 and aretaining clip600. When theactuator584 is in a fully retracted position as shown inFIG. 20, the articulatedseat deck30 is a generally flat orientation such that an upper surface606 of the articulatedseat deck30 is generally parallel to thelongitudinal rails538 and540 of theload frame26. Extension of therod588 relative to thebody586 of theactuator584 causes the articulated seat deck to pivot about theaxis582 so that foot end of the articulatedseat deck30 is raised. As will be discussed in further detail below, the raising of the articulatedseat deck30 causes movement of thefirst portion36 of thefoot deck34. One suitable actuator for this application is a Model TA23 actuator available from TiMOTION Technology of Taiwan City, Taiwan.
Thehead deck28 includes aframe610 which is supported on theload frame26 and moves relative to theload frame26 through anadvanced articulation mechanism608 that causes thehead deck28 to both translate and pivot relative to theload frame26. Thehead deck28 is supported on a pair of pivot supports612 and614 which define a pivot axis616 about which thehead deck28 pivots. Theframe610 of thehead deck28 includes a pair ofyokes618 and620 which engage with the pivot supports612 and614, respectively. Theyokes618 and620 are secured to the pivot supports612 and614 byrespective pins622,622 which are retained by respective retaining clips624,624. Eachpivot support612,614 is supported on arespective slide rail626 and628. Referring toFIG. 21, the slide rails626 and628 are supported on the respectivelongitudinal rails538 and540 of theload frame26.
Eachlongitudinal rail538 and540 supports a pair ofmounts630 secured to therespective rail538 or540 as suggested inFIG. 21. The discussion of theadvanced articulation mechanism608 will reference the structure positioned on theright side18 of theload frame26, but the structure on theleft side16 is a mirror of the structure on theright side18. The slide rails626 and628 are attached to themounts630 by a pair offasteners632. The slide rails626 and628 are engaged by the pivot supports612 and614 such that the pivot supports612 and614 are permitted to translate or slide along the longitudinal length of the slide rails626 and628 which thereby provides for translation of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26. As shown inFIG. 21, thepivot support614 includes a pair of pivot blocks634 which each include achannel636 which engages theslide rail628 so that to theblocks634 clamp over theslide rail628 to capture theslide rail628 in therespective channels636,636. The pivot blocks634 are retained together by clamping of aninner plate638 to anouter plate640 by a number offasteners642 which pass through the pivot blocks634 and are threaded into corresponding threaded holes644 in theinner plate638. The clamping action of thefasteners642 and theplates638 and640 secure the pivot blocks634 to theslide rail628. The engagement ofpivot support612 to sliderail626 is achieved in the same way as the engagement ofpivot support614 to sliderail628.
Movement of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26 is controlled by anactuator650. Theactuator650 includes abody652 and arod654 which is extendable and retractable relative to thebody652. Theactuator650 includes arod end656 and anend658, each of which facilitates pinning theactuator650 to respective connecting points on theload frame26 andhead deck28. Theframe610 of thehead deck28 includes threeflanging660 which are secured to acrossmember662. Two of theflanges660,660 cooperate to define ayoke664 to which theend658 of theactuator650 is connected for pivotable movement by apin666. One suitable actuator for this application is a Model TA15 actuator available from TiMOTION Technology of Taiwan City, Taiwan.
Similarly, theload frame26 includes threeflanges668 which are supported from acrossmember646. Two of theflanges668 cooperate to define a yoke670 to which therod end656 of theactuator650 is pivotably coupled by a pin672. Theactuator650 extends and retracts to change the distance between theend658 and therod end656. This extension and retraction results in movement of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26. A gas spring674 is also coupled to both theload frame26 and thehead deck28. Anend676 of the spring674 is secured to thethird flange668 for pivotable movement relative thereto by the pin672 so that the gas spring674 and rod end656 of theactuator650 are both pivotable about an axis678 defined by the pin672. The gas spring674 includes arod680 and arod end682 with therod end682 being secured to thethird flange660 on theframe610 of thehead deck28 by thepin666 so that therod end682 and theend658 of theactuator650 each pivot about an axis684 defined by thepin666.
Theactuator650 includes an internal quick release mechanism which may be activated by a caregiver to quickly lower thehead deck28 to horizontal position in the event of an emergency, such as at a time when the caregiver may need to conduct cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) on a patient supported on thehospital bed10. The gas spring674 provides resistance to the lowering of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26 when the quick release is activated thereby control the lowering of thehead deck28.
Because thehead deck28 is both pivotable and translatable relative to theload frame26, it is necessary to have a control link to guide the movement of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26. This is accomplished by twoground links686 and688 which are pivotably coupled to both theload frame26 and thehead deck28 to control movement of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26. As shown inFIG. 21, theground link688 is pivotably coupled to theload frame26 at amount690 which is secured to thelongitudinal rail540 of theload frame26. Themount690 is formed to include a through-hole692 through which apivot sleeve694 is positioned. Theground link688 includes apivot member696 which is positioned through thehole692 into thepivot sleeve694. Apivot washer698 is positioned over thepivot member696 and between theground link688 and themount690 to facilitate movement of the ground link relative to themount690. Thepivot sleeve694 is retained on thepivot member696 by a retainingring700 such that theground link688 is pivotable relative to themount690 by the interaction of thebearing698 andpivot sleeve694 supporting thepivot member696 in the thru-hole692.
The opposite end of theground link688 also includes apivot member696 which is positioned in a thru-hole702 formed in a frame member704 of theframe610. Thepivot member696 is engaged with the frame member704 utilizing apivot washer698,pivot sleeve694, and retainingring700 similar to the engagement of theground link688 with themount690. Theground link686 is engaged with theload frame26 andhead deck28 in the same manner on the opposite side. Thus, the ground links686 and688 are pivotable relative to theload frame26 about an axis706 and thehead deck28 is pivotable relative to the ground links686 and688 about anaxis708.
In operation, extension of theactuator650 causes compound movement of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26 as the axis616 about which thehead deck28 pivots translates along the slide rails626 and628. The ground links686 and688 control movement of thehead deck28 relative to theload frame26 by constraining longitudinal movement along the slide rails626 and628 and inducing rotation through the interaction of the ground links with theaxis708 relative to the axis616 to cause the compound advanced articulation which results in movement of thehead deck28 away from the day articulatedseat deck30 toward thehead end14 of thehospital bed10 while also causing pivoting of thehead deck28 about the axis616.
Thehead deck28 includes aCPR release mechanism1500 that is supported on theframe610 as suggested inFIGS. 22-23. TheCPR release mechanism1500 is actuated by one of twohandles1502,1504 that are positioned below thedeck1344 on opposite sides of thehead deck28. Referring to thehandle1502, thegrip1506 is secured to anactuator1508 by twoscrews1510,1510. Thehandle1502 is pivotable relative to theframe610 about apin1510 such that when thehandle1502 is pulled in the direction of anarrow1512, the quick release mechanism of theactuator650 is activated to lower thehead deck28. Theactuator1508 is engaged with arod1514 and therod1514 engages a plate1516 resting in anarcuate slot1518 formed in the plate1516. The plate1516 is pivotable about anaxle1520 such that when therod1514 reaches aterminal end1522 of theslot1518; the motion in the direction ofarrow1512 causes the plate1516 to rotate in the direction of anarrow1524. Aspring1526 is secured to a channel1528 of theframe610 and therod1514 to bias the rod to the home position shown inFIG. 101. Acable assembly1530 includes asheath1532 and a wire1534 that is movable within thesheath1532. The sheath is grounded to aflange1536 secured to the channel1528. The wire1534 is secured to the plate1516 so that rotation of theplate1524 on theaxle1520 moves the wire1534 relative to thesheath1532, transferring motion to the quick release mechanism of theactuator650.
Thehandle1504 operates in a similar fashion with thegrip1538 pin secured to anactuator1540 which is pivotable on apin1542. Pivoting of thehandle1504 about thepin1542 acts on awire1544 which is secured to theactuator1540. When thewire1544 reaches theterminal end1546 of aslot1548, thewire1544 causes the plate1516 to rotate in the direction ofarrow1524 onaxle1520. Aspring1550 urges thehandle1504 to the home position shown inFIG. 101. Each of therods1514 and1544 is free to move in theslots1518 and1548 if the plate is acted upon by the other of therods1514 and1544. The lost motion effect of therods1514,1544 inslots1518,1548 prevent interference with the operation of theCPR release mechanism1500 by the other of thehandles1502,1504, but allow asingle cable1530 to be directed to the release mechanism of theactuator650.
Therelease mechanism1500 further includes alimit switch1552 which is secured to the channel1528. Thelimit switch1552 includes anactuation arm1554 having arounded end1556 which engages an outer edge1558 of the plate1516. The plate1516 axes a cam relative to thelimit switch1552 so that when theplate1524 is rotated, theend1556 of theactuation arm1554 engages asurface1560 which causes thelimit switch1552 to be activated to indicate that therelease mechanism1500 has been activated. Theswitch1552 provides a signal to the control system400 of thehospital bed10 indicating that the CPR has been activated.
As shown inFIGS. 13-14, thefoot deck34 shown to include thefirst portion36 and thesecond portion38 which moves relative to the first portion to extend and retract the length of thefoot deck34. Extension and retraction of thefoot deck34 is controlled by anactuator730 which is fixed to thefirst portion36. Theactuator730 includes abody732, arod734, and arod end736. Therod end736 is pinned to thesecond portion38. Theactuator730 includes anend738 which is pendant to ayoke740 on thefirst portion36 and secured by apin742 and retainingclip744. When theactuator730 is in a retracted position, such as that shown inFIG. 13, thefoot deck34 is fully retracted with its length minimized. Extension of theactuator730 drives the second portion toward thefoot end12 of thefoot deck34 to extend the length of thefoot deck34 and, thereby, the length of thehospital bed10. One suitable actuator for this application is a Model TA9 actuator available from TiMOTION Technology of Taiwan City, Taiwan.
Thefirst portion36 includes aframe746 withlaterally space rails748 and750. Each of therails748 and750 have twoaxles752 positioned on the outboard sides of therails748 and750 which are capped with a pair ofcaps753,753. Thesecond portion38 includes a pair ofguides751 positioned in the end ofchannels758 and760 that engage therails748,750 offirst portion36 to guidesecond portion38 as it moves relative tofirst portion36. The first portion includes a pair ofrollers754 on each side, each of therollers754 supported on anaxle752. Thesecond portion38 includes aframe756 which has a pair of laterally spacedchannel members758 and760. When thesecond portion38 is engaged with thefirst portion36, therollers754 are retained on theaxles752 by the engagement of therollers754 with therespective channels762 and764 of thechannel members758 and760.
Thesecond portion38 is supported on thefirst portion36 by the interaction of therollers754 with thechannels762 and764 and the interaction of therails748,750 offirst portion36 with theguides751,751. Thesecond portion38 includes adeck panel766 which spans the distance between thechannel members758 and762 define anupper support surface768. Thefirst portion36 also includes adeck panel772 which has anupper support surface774. When thesecond portion38 is engaged with thefirst portion36, a portion of thedeck panel766 overlies a portion of thedeck panel772. Further support for the engagement between thefirst portion36 and thesecond portion38 is provided by threeglide members776 which are secured to a lower surface778 of thedeck panel766. Theglide members776 are secured to the surface778 by an adhesive and are positioned to engage theupper surface774 of thedeck panel772 of thefirst portion36. The glide members act as bearings between thedeck panel766 anddeck panel772 during extension and retraction of thefoot deck34.
Therod end736 of theactuator730 is connected to ayoke780 formed on thesecond portion38 by apin782 and aretaining clip784. Theyoke780 is formed in achannel member786 positioned at thefoot end12 of thesecond portion38. Thechannel member786 is open toward thefoot end12 to define a space in which electrical indicator components may be positioned. The electrical components are enclosed by acover788 which is secured to thebase frame20 by sixfasteners790. The electrical components are best seenFIG. 18 and include a pair ofcircuit boards792 and794 which are configured to generate indicators of the status of certain conditions of thehospital bed10 as will be discussed in further detail below.
Thecircuit boards792 and794 are a part of anindicator system796 that provides detailed information to a caregiver regarding the status of thehospital bed10 and a patient supported on thehospital bed10. Thecircuit boards792 and794 receive information over acable798 that is connected to the control system400 of thehospital bed10.Circuit board792 is connected to thecircuit board794 by another cable800. Thecircuit boards792 and794 include logic which processes the information provided over thecable798 to cause theindicator system796 to provide an indication of the status of components of thehospital bed10. In the illustrative embodiment, the indicator system provides information regarding the status of ahospital bed10 exit system of thehospital bed10, an indication as to whether or not thehospital bed10 is in its lowest position, and an indication as to whether not all of the side rails48,50,58, and60 are in their raised position.
Indication of the statuses may be projected onto the floor below thefoot deck34 by one of fourprojectors802,804,806, or808. For example, theprojector808 is associated with the indication as to whether or not all of the side rails48,50,58, and60 are in their raised position. When active, theprojector808 projects an image such as theimage1560 shown on the floor inFIG. 97. Theimage1560 may be projected in either a green or amber color. To project theimage1560, theprojector808 is mounted over a pair of LEDs mounted on thecircuit board792, with one of the LEDs illuminating in an amber color and the other of the LEDs illuminating a green color. When one or the other of the two LEDs is illuminated, the light is conducted through theprojector808 and through theslide828 positioned in theprojector808. Theprojector808 is shown in further detail inFIG. 19 where theslide828 is positioned in theprojector808, light is transmitted through abody1562 of theprojector808 and alens820 which controls the focus of theimage1560 on the floor. If the control system400 of thehospital bed10 provides a signal to the logic of theindication system796 that one or more of thesiderails48,50,58, and60 are not in the raised position, the amber LED associated withprojector808 would be illuminated so that theimage1560 would be illuminated in an amber color.
Theindication system796 also includes alamp816 which has a frusto-conical shape with anend1564 that is configured to overlie another pair of LEDs on thecircuit board792. Thelamp816 is configured to direct light from the associate LEDs to anouter surface1566 of thecover788. Thelamp816 shown inFIG. 18 is associated with anindicator1568 shown inFIG. 97. Theindicator1568 is part of an overlay1570 positioned on thecover788. The overlay1570 is configured to position certain indicia over the openings of the various lamps, such as the opening1572 forlamp816 as shown inFIG. 99. Thus, when thelamp816 is illuminated by the LEDs, the light from the LEDs is transmitted through theindicator1568. The logic that determines whether or not one or more of thesiderails48,50,58,60 are in their raised position also controls the operation of the LEDs associated with theindicator1568 andlamp816. The control system400 of thehospital bed10 is operable to operate theindication system796 to illuminate theindicator1568 and theimage1560 each provide the status of thesiderails48,50,58,60 simultaneously. The control system400 may also be configured to illuminate theindicator1568 only without projecting theimage1560, or project only theimage1560 without illuminating theindicator1568.
Theprojector806 utilizes aslide826 to illuminate animage1584 on the floor that is similar to the icon shown as anindicator1574 shown inFIG. 97. Theindicator1574 and an accompanyingimage1584, which is not shown in detail, provide an indication that a patient position monitoring system of thehospital bed10 is not armed. Theindicator1574 is illuminated by alamp814.Projector806 andlamp814 engage thecircuit board792 in a manner similar to that ofprojector808 andlamp816. When theimage1584 orindicator1574 are illuminated green, it provides an indication that the patient position monitoring system is not armed and that patient position monitoring is not indicated for the patient associated with thehospital bed10. This may rely on information entered into thehospital bed10 controller by a caregiver, or may be gathered by the control system400 from an electronic medical record system of the hospital. If theindicator1574, or the associatedimage1584, is illuminated amber, a caregiver will know that the patient position monitoring system is not armed but that the patient has indications that a support protocol that requires the use of the patient position monitoring system.
Aprojector804 engages LEDs on thecircuit board794 and projects animage1576 by way of aslide824. Theimage1576 is projected when the patient position monitoring system is armed. Similarly anindicator1578 is illuminated by alamp812. When theimage1576 and/or theindicator1578 are green, it provides an indication that the patient position monitoring system is armed and that no alarm condition has been detected. On the other hand, if theimage1576 and/or theindicator1578 are presented in an amber color, it provides an indication that the patient position monitoring system is armed and an alarm condition exists.
Aprojector802 projects light through aslide822 to present animage1580 that conveys the status of thehospital bed10 position. Referring toFIG. 97, when thehospital bed10 is in its lowest position, theimage1580 is projected in green while an amber color indicates that thehospital bed10 is not in its lowest position. Similarly, a lamp810 (seen inFIG. 18) conducts light to anindicator1582 the same logic as applied to theimage1580 regarding the appropriate color.
Astandard overlay832 is positionable on thesurface1566 as shown inFIG. 98. Thecover788 includes a number ofchannels1586 positioned on theright side18 of thefoot deck34. The channels are sized to receive one ormore labels1590 that includevarious indicia1588 that provide information to a user as to the configuration of thehospital bed10. Thelabels1590 provide a quick reference for caregiver to identify the options present on theparticular hospital bed10.
Referring now toFIG. 99, it is shown how the arrangement of thelamps802,804,806,808 are capable of projecting thevarious images1580,1584,1576,1560 onto asurface1590 of the floor. Because theimages1576 and1584 are mutually exclusive, thelamps806 and804 are arranged projector images at the same point.FIG. 100 shows how theimages1580,1584,1576,1560 are projected at a position that is not directly vertically below thefoot end12 of thehead deck34, but are spaced horizontally adistance1592. The deviation of theimages1580,1584,1576,1560 outwardly from a position directly below thefoot deck34 assures that the images will be visible when thehospital bed10 is in its lowest position and a caregiver's view of theimages1580,1584,1576,1560 is not obstructed.
As shown inFIG. 97, the overlay1570 is similar to theoverlay832 ofFIG. 98, however the overlay1570 includes anadditional indicator1594 and the notification system of the embodiment ofFIG. 97 is capable of projecting animage1596. In the embodiment ofFIG. 97, theindicator1594 andimage1596 provide notification to a caregiver of the status of an incontinence detection system. Following the approach used above, when theindicator1594 orimage1596 is presented in a green color, it is indicative that an incontinence system is active and no alarm conditions exist. However if theindicator1594 and/orimage1596 are presented in an amber color, it provides an indication to a caregiver that the incontinence detection system is active and an alarm condition exists.
It is contemplated that each of the monitored conditions would be independently configurable by a caregiver. For example, one or more of theindicators1568,1574,1578,1582, or1594 may be deactivated so that the particular condition is not indicated and the indicator remains dormant and not illuminated. As explained above, the projector's802,804,806,808 may be deactivated such that the caregiver only relies upon theindicators1568,1574,1578,1582, or1594 for an indication of the status by thenotification system796.
The head end side rails48 and50 are configurable to provide additional indications of the status of components of thehospital bed10 under the control of thenotification system796 by illuminating thegrip1166 of the head siderails48,50. In the embodiment ofFIG. 29, thebody1136 ofside rail48 has adepression1598 formed on the outboard side of thegrip1166 and achannel1600 formed in the interior of thegrip1166. In the embodiment ofFIG. 29, aninsert1602 is positioned in thedepression1598 to fill in the missing contour of thegrip1166 as shown inFIG. 26. In another embodiment shown inFIG. 137, alight strip1604 is positioned in thechannel1600 and atranslucent overlay1606 is positioned over thelight strip1604. Thecavity1600 is in communication with anoutlet1606 through which anend1608 is fed to connect to thecircuit board1182 of theside rail48.
Referring toFIGS. 138A-138E, the light strip comprises an electrical substrate encapsulated in a transparent material. Thelight strip1604 includes sixblue LEDs1610 positioned on the substrate which alternate with sixamber LEDs1612. Theend1608 includes astiffener1614 which is provided for support for aconnector1616. The connector hasalternate leads1618,1620,1622, and1624 with theleads1620,1624 providing a common to therespective LEDs1610,1612. Thelead1618 provides a current to theLEDs1610 from thecircuit board1182 when theLEDs1610 are to be illuminated. Similarly, thelead1620 provides current to theLEDs1612 when theLEDs1612 are to be illuminated. Abody1626 of thelight strip1604 has a larger thickness and is relatively stiff. Anadhesive backing1628 is used to secure the light strip in thechannel1600. Atail1630 is secured to thebody1626 but has sufficient flexibility to be routed through theside rail body1136. As indicated inFIG. 138E, a signal from thecircuit board1182 simultaneously illuminates all of theLEDs1610.
In operation thelight strip1604 has three states, none of theLEDs1610,1612 being illuminated, theblue LEDs1610 being illuminated, or theamber LEDs1612 being illuminated. In the current embodiment, none of theLEDs1610,1612 are illuminated in one of two conditions: if the patient position monitoring system is disarmed and the patient is inhospital bed10, or if the patient position monitoring system is armed and the patient is in the proper position. Theblue LEDs1610 are illuminated if the patient position monitoring system is disarmed the patient is out of thehospital bed10. Theblue LEDs1610 tend to provide additional lighting for the patient if the ambient light is relatively low. Theamber LEDs1612 are illuminated if the patient position monitoring system is armed and the patient is not in the proper position. This amber illumination provides an additional indication to a caregiver of the alarm condition of the patient position monitoring system.
Thenotification system796 is configurable to allow or prevent the illumination capabilities of thegrip1166. A caregiver may choose to disable the illuminated grips as a part of thenotification system796 when the caregiver determines that the operation of the illuminatedgrip1166 is unnecessary or would be problematic with a particular patient. Thus, the caregiver can configure the notification769 to monitor one or more conditions and provide an indication to a caregiver by illuminating an indicator on thefoot deck34, projecting an image on the floor, and/or illuminating thegrip1166. In some embodiments, the illumination of thegrip1166 and the amber color may be configured to be based on a different condition, such as the expiration of a time between vital signs checks, or any other condition of which the caregiver might need to be reminded. In addition, the illuminated grip may be illuminated in the amber color if any of the alarm conditions of thehospital bed10 are active, the amber color providing an indication to the caregiver then alarm condition, or a condition that does not meet a patient's care protocol exists.
Referring again now toFIG. 13, management of thecable798 is accomplished with a rigidwire routing bracket840 which is secured to thechannel member786 with a pair offasteners842 and extends from thechannel member786 through in opening844 formed in aplate846 of theframe746 of thefirst portion36. Thecable798 is secured to therigid guide840 by wire ties (not shown). As shown inFIG. 14, aflexible guide848 is secured to an end850 of therigid guide840 and secured to thefirst portion36 by abracket852 which is secured to thefirst portion36 with afastener854. Theflexible guide848 is constructed of a material that is flexible but has a sufficient cross-section to control the collapsing of theflexible guide848 into a shape as shown inFIG. 14. Thecable798 is also secured with wire ties to theflexible guide848 such that when thesecond portion38 is retracted relative to thefirst portion36, theflexible guide848 controls gathering of thecable798 within the footprint of thefirst portion36. The combination of therigid guide840 andflexible guide848 allows for controlled gathering of thecable798 throughout the range of motion of thesecond portion38 relative to thefirst portion36 while preventing thecable798 from drooping below the confines of thefirst portion36.
Referring again now toFIG. 14, thesecond portion38 is formed to include a pair of drainage bag hooks558,558 on opposite sides of thesecond portion38. The drainage bag hooks558 have a similar used to those on theload frame26. In addition, thefoot deck34 includes a pair of wire form bag supports860 and862 with the bag supports860 and862 being symmetrical mirror images of each other. With reference to thebag support860 it can be seen that thebag support860 includes afirst leg864 which is linear and asecond leg866 which terminates in ahook868. Theleg864 is positioned at ahole870 formed in thechannel member786 and the hook is received in abracket872 seen inFIG. 13. Thebag support860 is positioned on thesecond portion38 by inserting theleg864 into thehole870 and into asecond hole874 positioned on a lower flanges of thechannel member786. Once secured, thesecond leg866 is deflected to permit thehook868 to be positioned between thebracket872 and asurface876 of thechannel member760. Once the deflection of theleg866 is released, thehook868 engages thebracket872 to secure thebag support860 in place on thefoot deck34. When the bag supports860,862 are mounted to thesecond portion38 of thefoot deck34 and move with thefoot deck34 as it is moved to various orientations relative to horizontal. Referring toFIG. 10,bag support860 includes anupper rail3540 that is not parallel to therail758 of thesecond portion38. Afirst end3542 is spaced apart from therail758 than asecond end3544. The ends3542 and3544 form loops withrespective legs864 and996 of thebag support860. A second,smaller rail998 is positioned below theupper rail990.
Thebag support862 is positioned on the opposite side of thesecond portion38 in a similar manner. Thesecond portion38 also supports a pair ofbumpers880 and882 that are positioned at the corners of thefoot deck34 being received between flanges of thechannel member786. Thebumpers880 and882 rotate onaxles884,884 which are positioned on thechannel member786 with aslot886 formed in eachaxle884 engaging andanti-rotation feature888 or890 formed in the lower flange of thechannel member786. Theaxles884,884 are secured in place by retainingclips892 to prevent rotation of theaxles884,884 relative to thechannel member786. However, thebumpers880,882 are free to rotate about theaxles884 if they should come in contact with an outer surface, such as a wall, as thehospital bed10 is moved.
Thefoot deck34 is coupled to the articulatedseat deck30 such that movement of the articulatedseat deck30 about theaxis582 induces movement of thefoot deck34. Thefoot deck34 includes twoyokes900,902 which engage therails564 and566 of the articulatedseat deck30 and are secured thereto by two pins904,906 (shown inFIG. 20). Pins904,906 pass through the respective thru-holes908,910 of twobearings572,572 and are secured by retainingclips578,578. A pair ofwashers580 is used at each connection between the respective flanges of theyokes900,902 and the pins904,906 and retainingclips578,578. The pins904,906 cooperate to define a pivot axis912 about which thefoot deck34 pivots.
In some embodiments, thefoot deck34 is also connected to theload frame26 through anactuator920 shown in phantomFIG. 17. Theactuator920 is optional and is shown in phantom inFIG. 17. Theactuator920 may be replaced by amanual gatch mechanism1050. When present, theactuator920 includes an end922, abody924, arod926, and arod end928. Therod end928 is secured to ayoke931 formed on thefirst portion36 of thefoot deck34 with apin930 and retainingclip933. The end922 of theactuator920 is secured to ayoke935 secured to thecrossmember544 of the frame554 of theload frame26 by apin936 and retainingclip933. When theactuator920 maintains a fixed length, theactuator920 acts as a ground link which causes the pivoting of theactuator920 about thepin936 and the pivoting of thefoot deck34 about thepin930. Thus, movement of the articulatedseat deck30 by extension and retraction of theactuator584 causes movement of thefoot deck34 as constrained by theactuator920. Additional movement of thefoot deck34 is caused by extension and retraction of theactuator920 to change the relative position of thefoot deck34 relative to the articulatedseat deck30. One suitable actuator for this application is a Model TA23 actuator available from TiMOTION Technology of Taiwan City, Taiwan.
In a different embodiment, shown inFIGS. 15-16, thefoot deck34 is replaced byfoot deck934 that utilizes a manual release mechanism940 to permit a user to move asecond portion938 relative to afirst portion936. The release mechanism940 includes achannel942 which is secured to theframe746 of thefirst portion936 by abolt944 andnut946 which secures thechannel942 to theyoke740. The channel is formed to include twoflanges948 and950 which engage theplate846 of theframe746. A pair offasteners952,952 secure theflanges948,950 to theplate846 by threading intoholes956 and958 formed in theplate846. Acatch bar954 is received telescopically in thechannel942 when thesecond portion938 is engaged with thefirst portion936. Thecatch bar954 moves telescopically relative to thechannel942. A pair ofglides960,960 is positioned in a pair of holes formed insidewalls966 and968 of thechannel942. Referring toFIG. 16, theglides960,960 each include prongs which are flexible and permit theglides960,960 to be positioned in the holes by a snap fit such that theglides960,960 limit lateral movement of thecatch bar954 when the manual release mechanism940 is assembled as shown inFIG. 16.
The release mechanism940 further includes acatch assembly972 which is supported on thecatch bar954. As shown inFIG. 16, thecatch assembly972 includes abolt974 which passes through afirst boss976, ahole978 formed in thecatch bar954, asecond boss980, and secured with anut982. Thehole978 is best seen inFIG. 15. Thechannel member942 is formed to include a guide slot984 in thesidewall968 and aguide slot986 in thesidewall966. Theguide slots984,986 are similar structures with each having aguide channel988 and fivestops900,992,994,996, and998. Thecatch assembly972 is positioned in theguide slots984 and986 with thebosses976 and980 being arranged to engage the outer surfaces of thesidewalls966 and968 such that they overlap the edges of theguide slots984,986 to prevent lateral movement of thecatch assembly972 relative to thechannel942. Based on a manual input which will be described in further detail below, thecatch assembly972 may be disengaged from any one of thestops900,992,994,996,998 and moved along theguide channel988 to be positioned in another of thestops900,992,994,996,998. Positioning of thecatch assembly972 in one of thestops900,992,994,996,998 restricts movement of thesecond portion938 relative to thefirst portion936 of thefoot deck934. Utilizing the manual release mechanism940, a user may release thesecond portion938 relative to thefirst portion936 and adjust the position of thesecond portion938 in one of the discrete positions defined by thestops990,992,994,996, and998.
Referring again now toFIG. 16, the release mechanism940 includes arelease handle assembly1000 which is fixed to thesecond portion938 and pivotable relative thereto, and engages thecatch bar954 so that movement of thehandle assembly1000 induces movement of thecatch bar954 to disengage thecatch assembly972 from one of thestops990,992,994,996,998 so that thesecond portion938 may be move relative to thefirst portion936. Thecatch bar954 is pivotably coupled to theyoke780 of theframe756 of thesecond portion938. Thecatch bar954 is formed to include a hole1002 through which apin1004 passes to secure thecatch bar954 to theyoke780. Assembly of thecatch bar954 to theyoke780 further includes a pair ofbushings1006,1006 which are positioned between the catch bar and therespective flanges1008 and1010 of theyoke780. Thepin1004 is secured in place by aretaining clip1012. Pivoting of the catch bar about anaxis1014 causes the catch assembly to move in and out of engagement with thestops990,992,994,996, and998.
Thehandle assembly1000 permits a user to cause pivoting of thecatch bar954 about theaxis1014. A mountingbracket1016 is positioned on thelower surface770 of thedeck panel766 and secured to thechannel member786 by a pair offasteners1018,1018. The mountingbracket1016 includes a pair ofholes1020 and1022 positioned onopposite flanges1024 and1026 of the mountingbracket1016. The mountingholes1020,1022 cooperate to define anaxis1027 about which thehandle assembly1000 pivots when actuated by user. Referring toFIG. 15, thehandle assembly1000 is secured to the mountingbracket1016 by apin1028 which passes through to pivotarms1030,1032 of thehandle assembly1000 as well as theholes1020 and1022 of the mountingbracket1016. Thepin1028 is secured by aretaining clip1034. Thecatch bar954 is formed to include aslot1036 which is engaged by anotherpin1038 which passes through thearms1030 and1032 and is secured by retainingclip1040. Thepin1038 is free to move in theslot1036 and pivots about theaxis1027 when thehandle assembly1000 is actuated by user. Thehandle assembly1000 includes ahandle member1042 which is secured to an end of thearms1030,1032 distally from thepin1028. Thehandle assembly1000 further includes a pair ofgrips1044 and1046 which are positioned on thehandle member1042.
As shown inFIG. 16, to adjust the position of thesecond portion938 to thefirst portion936 of thefoot deck934, a user actuates thehandle assembly1000 by applying upward pressure to thehandle member1042 which causes thepin1038 to engage theslot1036 of thecatch bar954 urging thecatch bar954 upwardly. Thecatch bar954 is constrained by thepin1004 and the action on thehandle member1042 causes thecatch bar954 to pivot about theaxis1014, which results in the disengagement of thecatch assembly972 from one of thestops990,992,994,996,998. Once thecatch assembly972 is disengaged, a user applies pressure to thesecond portion938 to cause it to move relative to thefirst portion936 to extend or retract thefoot deck34. The user then releases the pressure on thehandle member1042, permitting thecatch assembly972 to be lowered such that it may engage one of thestops990,992,994,996,998 to secure the position of thesecond portion932 relative to thefirst portion936.
The embodiment of thefoot deck934 may be moved relative to the articulatedseat deck30 is a manner similar to that with whichfoot deck34 is moved relative to the articulatedseat deck30 by theactuator920. However, in some embodiments, theactuator920 may be omitted and a foot deck may be pivoted relative to the seat deck manually between first and second positions utilizing amanual gatch mechanism1050 shown inFIG. 17. Theactuator920 andgatch mechanism1050 are mutually exclusive and one must be omitted to use the other. When themanual gatch mechanism1050 is utilized, a pair of gatch supports1052 and1054 is added to theload frame26 and each extends below the foot deck. It should be understood that themanual gatch mechanism1050 can be used with a foot deck that has power extension retraction likefoot deck34 or a foot deck with manual extension and retraction such asfoot deck934. The gatch supports1052 and1054 are inserted into the tubular structure of thelongitudinal rails538 and540 of the frame554 of theload frame26. The gatch supports1052 and1054 each include amount block1056 welded to a respective channel member1058 and1060. The mount blocks include a pair of threadedholes1062,1062 into which a pair offasteners1064,1064 are threaded through thelongitudinal rails538 and540 to secure the respective gatch supports1052 and1054 to thelongitudinal rails538 and540. Eachgatch support1052,1054 is formed to include arespective guide slot1066,1068. Eachguide slot1066,1068 includes aguide channel1070 and a pair ofstops1072,1074. As will be described in further detail below, thestops1072,1074 permit thefoot deck34 to be moved between first and second positions relative to the articulatedseat deck30.
Themanual gatch mechanism1050 further includes agatch member1076 which is pivotable relative to thefirst portion36 of thefoot deck34 and engages the gatch supports1052 and1054 to support thefoot deck34 in a gatch position. Thegatch member1076 includes agatch tube1078 which is coupled to a pair ofpivot arms1080 and1082. Thepivot arms1080 and1082 each have arespective hole1084 and1086 which define anaxis1088 about which thegatch member1076 pivots. Themanual gatch mechanism1050 further includes a pair of pivot brackets10901092 which are each secured to theplate846 by a pair ofscrews1094,1094 and nuts1095,1095. Each pivot bracket1091,1092 forms a yoke withflanges1096 and1098. Theflanges1096,1098 each have a respective thru-hole1100 and1102 which are aligned along theaxis1088. Thepivot arms1080 and1082 are secured to the respective pivot brackets1090 and1092 byrespective pins1104 and1106 such that thegatch member1076 pivots on thepins1104 and1106 about theaxis1088. Thepins11041106 are secured byrespective retaining clips1108 and1110. Thegatch member1076 is positioned so that thetube1078 is positioned in theguides1066 and1068. Themanual gatch mechanism1050 further includes abar1112 which is passed through thetube1078 and has a length that extends beyond thetube1078. Thebar1112 is capped by a pair ofknobs1114 and1116 which are grip coupled by a user to disengage thetube1078 with arespective stop1070,1072. The user is then able to move the foot deck relative to the articulatedseat deck30 to move thetube1078 to the other of thestops1068,1068 or1070,1070 to change the orientation of the foot deck relative to the articulatedseat deck30.
When thetube1078 is positioned in thestops1070,1070 of the gatch supports1052 and1054, the foot deck will be aligned with the articulatedseat deck30 when the seat deck is a lowered position. Thegatch member1076 services the ground link between the foot deck and theload frame26 to control motion of the foot deck relative to theload frame26 when the articulatedseat deck30 is moved. For example, when theactuator584 is extended to raise thefoot end12 of the articulatedseat deck30, the movement of the articulatedseat deck30 urges the foot deck toward thehead end14 of thehospital bed10. Thegatch member1076 controls movement of the foot deck such that thepivot arms1082 pivot about thetube1078 causing thefoot end12 of the foot deck to raise, keeping the foot deck generally parallel to theload frame26. A user may move thetube1078 from thestop1070 to thestop1072 to change the angle between the foot deck and the articulatedseat deck30. This will tend to increase the angle of brake at the patient's knee due to the gatch in effect of themanual gatch mechanism1050. Thus, when thetube1078 is positioned in thestops1070,1070, raising of the articulatedseat deck30 will cause pivoting of the patient's hips to raise the patient's thighs while maintaining the patient's lower legs in a horizontal orientation, unless themanual gatch mechanism1050 is moved to increase the angle between the articulatedseat deck30 and the foot deck.
As shown inFIG. 28, the rightside head rail50 is shown in an exploded assembly view and includes an injection moldedbody1130. The injection moldedbody1130 is formed to include several features which will be described in further detail, but each of which is a part of themonolithic body1130. The lefthead side rail48 including abody1136 is shown inFIG. 29. Thebodies1130,1136 have similar structures, but are mirror images. The interior of the righthead side rail50 is shown inFIGS. 26 and 28, while the exterior of lefthead side rail48 is shown inFIGS. 26 and 29. In describing the structures, the interior features will be described with reference to righthead side rail50 and the exterior features will be described with reference to lefthead side rail48.
The interior ofbodies1130,1136 are formed to include acavity1132 which is configured to receive alinkage1134 as will be described in further detail below. In addition, an elongated depression1128 is positioned at thehead end14 of thebodies1130,1136 near a lower edge. The elongated depression1128 increases the stiffness of thebodies1130 and1136. A head end edge1126 has a lowercurved portion1140 and terminates in aprotrusion1142 that has acurved edge1144 and a generallyvertical surface1146 which faces thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10. Theprotrusion1142 functions to retain lines and cords that may be engaged with the patient or patient care devices on thehospital bed10 by preventing the lines and cords from slipping over the head end of the side rail and falling onto the floor or potentially becoming entangled with mechanisms of thehospital bed10. An upper edge1148 is generally continuous with the exception of apendant mount1150 which is formed on the upper edge1148 and configured to retain a pendant for access by a caregiver as will be described in further detail below. In addition, there is anopening1152 formed in thebodies1130 and1136 which provides a space for a person to grip an upper rail defined by theopening1152. Theopening1152 is sized such that an occupant of thehospital bed10 may insert their hand through theopening1152, grasp thegrip1154, and pull themselves up inhospital bed10 if they have migrated toward thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10. As best seen inFIG. 8, the upper portion of thebodies1130 and1136 diverges inwardly near thehead end14 of thebodies1130,1136. This inward divergence reduces the angle at which a user has to rotate their hand to grip thegrip1154 when they attempt to pull themselves up.
The upper edge1148 transitions into acurved portion1156 through aninflection point1158 and then defines aspace1160 in which a portion of the bodies of the foot side rails58,60 may extend to control the gap between the head side rails48,50 and foot side rails58,60. At the lower edge of thefoot end12 of thebodies1130,1136 atab1162 is formed to extend downwardly below the surface of a patient support surface such as a mattress, for example. Thetab1162 reduces the opportunity for a patient to get their hand under thebodies1130,1136 when the side rails48,50 are in a raised position. Anotheropening1164 is formed through thebodies1130,1136 along thecurved portion1156 two define agrip1166 which may also be grasped by a patient to reposition themselves. Along the upper edge1148 and on the inboard side of thebodies1130,1136, apendant mount1168 provides for the mounting of a pendant for access by a patient as will be described in further detail below. Acurved channel1170 is formed in adepression1172 on the inboard side of thebodies1130,1136. Thecurved channel1170 is configured to receive a ball (not shown) which roles in thechannel1170 as thehead deck28 is moved between raised and lowered positions. As will be described in further detail below, alabel1180 is placed in thedepression1172 to trap the ball in thechannel1170, the label providing an indication of the angle of inclination of thehead deck28.
Fixed electronic controls accessible to a patient are positioned in adepression1174 formed in the inboard side of thebodies1130,1136 and which communicates through thebody1130,1136 through anopening1176 to adepression1178 formed in the outboard side of thebodies1130,1136. As shown inFIG. 29, acircuit board1182 is positioned in thedepression1178 and secured by a fastener1184 of acover1186 overlies thecircuit board1182 and is secured in place by sixfasteners1188 which are screwed into thebody1130, or1136. Acontrol panel1190 includes a number of membrane switches which may be activated by a caregiver to control functions of thehospital bed10. The functions controlled by thecontrol panel1190 will be discussed in further detail below. Thecontrol panel1190 includes twoflex circuits1192,1194 which connects to corresponding connectors1196,1198. Theflex circuits1192,1194 are secured in place by thecover1186 and thecontrol panel1190 is secured to thecover1186 by an adhesive. Thecontrol panel1190 is then covered by a label (not shown inFIG. 29) which will be discussed in further detail below, but which is positioned in thedepression1178 to seal thedepression1178.
Aspeaker assembly1200 is positioned in thedepression1174 and the inboard side of thebodies1130,1136. Thespeaker assembly1200 includes a speaker back1202, aspeaker1204, and afoam ring seal1206. Aspeaker cover1209 is positioned in thedepression1174 and secured by fourfasteners1209. A secondfoam ring seal1210 is positioned to prevent ingress of fluid from thespeaker opening1212 of thespeaker cover1209. Thespeaker cover1209 is formed to include areceiver1214 into which aUSB charging receptacle1216 is positioned. TheUSB charging receptacle1216 provides appropriate electrical power and an outlet for a patient to plug a USB cable into to charge a device, such as a smart phone, for example. Anoverlay1211 is positioned on thecover1209 to provide a smooth surface and overlay thescrews1208.
As shown inFIG. 26, eachhead side rail48,50 includes acable guide1230 positioned in thecavity1132 and configured to manage a cable which connects the electronics of the side rails48,50 to the control system400 as will be described in further detail below. As shown in foot side rails58 and60, both of the side rails58 and60 have a similar construction, but are mirror images of each other. Each has arespective body1232 and1234. In the following discussion, the features of thebodies1232,1234 utilizing a single reference number for each feature with the understanding that the features are actually mirror images. The features that are present on the inboard side of thebodies1232,1234 will be discussed with reference tobody1234 and the features that are on the outboard side of thebodies1232,1234 will be discussed with reference tobody1232. Each of thebodies1232,1234 have acavity1132 configured as thecavities1132,1132 ofbodies1130,1136 of the head rails48,50 and configured to receive alinkage1134.
Thebodies1232,1234 have a generally linearlower edge1236 with an expandedcurved portion1238 near thehead end14 of thebodies1232,1234. The head end of thebodies1232,1234 have a generally arcuate edge1240 which is complementary to thespace1160 in the respective head rails48 and50. Thebodies1232,1234 transition to a generallyhorizontal rail1242 which is formed to define apocket1244 which is configured to receive alabel1246 which provides an indicia to a user of the proper positioning of a patient's hip on thepatient support apparatus10. Thebodies1232,1234 transition to rampsurface1248 which is configured to include apendant mounting structure1250 which will be described in further detail below. An upper edge1252 of thebodies1232,1234 extends from theramp surface1248 to a foot end of thebodies1232,1234. The upper edge1252 transitions to acurved portion1254 which then transitions to a generallyvertical edge1256 that extends downwardly generally to thelower elongate edge1236. At the transition between the generallyvertical edge1256 and thelower elongate edge1236 is a protrusion1258 which extends slightly below thelower edge1236 to reduce the opportunity for a patient to slip a hand or other body part under thelower edge1236.
Thebodies1232,1234 include anopening1260 which extends from aninboard surface1262 through thebodies1232,1234 to theoutboard surface1264. Theopening1260 provides the opportunity for an individual to extend their hand through theopening1260 when gripping therail1242, to reposition themselves, for example. A second opening1265 is formed in thebodies1232,1234 such that the upper edge1252 defines arail1266 which is graspable by a user. Anotch1268 is formed along the inboard side of therail1266 and configured to receive a handle of a urinal or other waste receptacle as will be described in further detail below. The bodies are also formed to include afirst indention1270 on theinboard side1262 near thefoot end12 of thebodies1232,1234. A similar indention1272 is formed on theinboard side1262 near thehead end14 of thebodies1232,1234. Theindentions1270 and1272 increase the stiffness of thebodies1232,1234. Still yet another opening1274 is formed in thebodies1232,1234 near thefoot end12 of thebodies1232,1234. The opening1274 is sized to receive hangers of various standard accessories which might be hung from the side rails58 and60. For example, the opening1274 is sized to receive the handle of a Pleur-evac or other similar chest a drainage device as will be discussed in further detail below. An additional pair ofprotrusions1276 and1278 are formed on the inboard side of therail1266 and configured to reduce the potential for devices, such as a waste receptacle, from sliding along the rail if theload frame26 is positioned in a tilt position.
Anadditional indentation1280 is formed on theinboard side1262 with theindentation1280 being spanned by astrap1282 such that thestrap1282 andindentation1280 cooperate to define a storage space which is sized to receive a smart phone or tablet computer for easy access by a patient. Thestrap1282 is secured to the body by a pair offasteners1284,1284. A pair of labels1286,1286 are each positioned over the heads of thefasteners1284. Theoutboard surface1264 defines a wedged shapedindentation1290 which is formed to include anarcuate channel1292 into which aball1294 is positioned. Theball1294 is retained in thechannel1292 by an overlay1296 which provides graduated indicia. As theload frame26 is tilted, theball1294 moves in thechannel1292 such that the location of theball1294 in thechannel1292 is indicative of the amount of tilt of theload frame26. The user is capable of determining the angle of tilt by comparing the position of the ball to the indicia placed on the overlay1296.
Thelinkage1134 includes aplate1300 which is configured to engage either thehead deck28 or theload frame26. Anupper plate1304 is configured to be secured to thebodies1136,1138,1232, and1234. Thelinkage1134 maintains thebodies1136,1138,1232, and1234 is generally in constant orientation as they are moved from the raised position shown inFIG. 1 to a lowered position as shown inFIG. 7. Thelinkages1134 engagemounts1302,1304 mounted to theload frame26 or mounts13,1308 secured to theframe610 of thehead deck28. Themounts1302,1304,1306, and1308 have a similar structure for engaging aplate1300 of thelinkage1134.Mount1302 includes two L-shapedapertures1310 and1312 which receive a pair ofhooks1314 and1316, respectively. Thehooks1314,1316 are secured to theplate1300 and are configured to be received through a vertical slot1318 in each of theapertures1310,1312. Once thehooks1314,1316 pass through the vertical slots1318,1318 thelinkage1134 is moved toward thefoot end12 of themount1302 as indicated byarrow1320. In this position, thehooks1314,1316 are positioned in ahorizontal slot1322 and support thelinkage1134 on themount1302. Once thelinkage1134 is properly placed forscrews1324 are inserted through theplate1300 and threaded into fourweld nuts1326 secured to aframe1328 of themount1302. Thelinkages1134 of each of the remainingsiderails48,50,58 are secured in a similar manner.
Aframe1330 of thelinkage1134 is positioned in thecavity1132 of thebody1234. To secure theframe1330 to thebody1234, fourbolts1332 are passed through four thru-holes1334 formed in thebody1234 as best seen in reference toside siderails48,58 inFIG. 26. The thru-holes1334 have a countersink feature so that the heads of thebolts1332 engage thebody1234. The bolts are secured with four nuts1336. A cover plate1338 snaps over theframe1330 to cover thenuts1336 and other portions of thelinkage1134. Thebodies1136,1130, and1232 of thesiderails48,50, and58, respectively, are each secured to theirrespective linkages1134 in the same manner. The structure of thelinkages1134 is of a type known in the art and used on the Progressa™ hospital bed available from Hill-Rom, Inc. of Batesville, Ind.
As shown inFIG. 22, the fixedseat deck32 is mounted to theload frame26 to overlie themounts1302 and1304 and secured with twoscrews1340,1342. Similarly, ahead deck pan1344 is secured to theframe610 of thehead deck28×2screws1346 and1348. Theload frame26 further includes across tube1350 which is positionedadjacent mounts1302,1304 and extends laterally across theload frame26. Thecross tube1350 has a hollow square cross-section which is configured to receive asupport member1352 in each end. Eachsupport member1352 is secured in each end of thecross tube1350 by ascrew1354. Referring to the structure on theright side18 of theFIG. 22, thesupport member1352 includes achannel1356 which is sized to receive abody1358 of agap filler1360. Thegap filler1360 includes twoflanges1362,1364 that engage twoflanges1366,1368 respectively that extend from thefoot end12 of theframe610. Apin1370 secures theflanges1362,1364 to theflanges1366,1368 such that theflanges1362,1364 are pivotable relative to theflanges1366,1368 as thehead deck28 moves relative to theload frame26. Theflanges1362,1364 are pivotably coupled to thebody1358 by apin1372 which permits theflanges1362,1364 to pivot relative to thebody1358. As thehead deck28 pivots and translates relative to theload frame26 theflanges1362,1364 pivot on thebody1358 and relative to theflanges1366,1368. In addition, the movement of thehead deck28 away from theload frame26 causes thebody1358 of thegap filler1360 to slide in thechannel1356 of thesupport member1352. Thebody1358 of thegap filler1360 acts as a barrier to prevent linens or other materials from being gathered in the gap between thehead deck28 and the fixedseat deck32. Asecond gap filler1360 is secured to twoflanges1372,1374 on theleft side16 ofFIG. 22 in a similar manner as theright side18.
As shown inFIG. 22, the fixedseat deck32 has awidth1376 that corresponds to awidth1378 of thepan1344 of thehead deck28. However, in some embodiments thehead deck28 and fixedseat deck32 may be omitted and replaced with a wider version as shown inFIG. 25. Awider head deck1379 includes awider pan1380 that is positionable on thedeck frame610. Thepan1380 has awidth1382 that is greater than thewidth1378 of thepan1344 shown inFIG. 24. Similarly, the fixedseat deck32 is replaced by a fixedseat deck1384 that has awidth1386 that corresponds to thewidth1382 of thepan1380 and is greater than thewidth1376 of the fixedseat deck32. While the head deck frame1388 ofFIG. 25 is wider than thehead deck frame610, theload frame26 is the same width in both embodiments. To accommodate the wider width, thesupport member1352 in each end of thecross tube1350 can be adjusted outwardly to accommodate the wider width with thescrew1354 being screwed into a different hole formed in thesupport member1352. In such a case, thegap filler1360 is replaced by a similar gap filler having an offset to lie in the offset channel. In addition, therods1514 and1544 have a longer length.
Referring toFIG. 27, the widerwidth head deck1379 and fixedseat deck1384 requires the extension of theside rail linkages1134 to accommodate the wider width. As shown inFIG. 27, eachside rail48,50,58,60 is engaged with anadapter1390 which includes abracket1392 havinghooks1394,1396 that engage theapertures1310,1312 of thevarious mounts1302,1304,1306,1308. Thehooks1314 and1316 of thelinkages1134 are positioned in slots formed in acrossmember1398 of theadapter1390. Theadapter1390 also includes twolegs1400 and1402 which are coupled to thecrossmember1398. Thelegs1400,1402 have thru-holes1404 which permitfasteners1406 to be inserted through theplate1300 and hooks1314 of theadapter1390 to secure thelinkages1134 by threading thefasteners1406 into theweld nuts1326 of themounts1302,1304,1306, and1308.
The variation in width is also accommodated in thefoot deck34 in that both thefirst portion36 andsecond portion38 may be constructed having a wider width than the embodiments shown inFIGS. 13-17 without otherwise varying the operation. Referring again now toFIG. 11, thebase frame20 includes thestructure1410 positioned at thehead end14 of thebase frame20 and supported on thecurved arms460,462 that are secured to thechannel146. In the narrow configuration, a pair ofbumpers assemblies1412,1414 may each be secured to ashelf1416 of thestructure1410 by fourscrews1418. Thebumpers assemblies1412,1414 include a pair of U-brackets1418 having anupper aperture1420 and aflange1422 and alower flange1424 with an antirotation feature1426 formed therein. Anaxle884 is positioned through aroller880 with achannel886 engaging and the antirotation feature1426 and thelower flange1424. In the wider version, a U-bracket1428 replaces the U-bracket1418, thebracket1428 having upper andlower flanges1430,1432 that are longer than theflanges1422,1424 of theU-bracket1418. This positions theroller880 further away from theshelf1416 to accommodate the wider width.
Thebase frame20 further includes twovertical tubes1440,1440 positioned adjacent one another in thestructure1410 extending downwardly through theshelf1416. Thetubes1440,1440 have a circular cross-section. A second pair oftubes1442 is spaced laterally away from thetubes1440,1440 and each extends downwardly from theshelf1416. Thetubes1442,1442 have a square cross-section. Thetubes1440 are hollow and sized to receive around peg1444 which extends from thelower surface1446 of thehead panel44 as shown inFIG. 48. Similarly, thetubes1442,1442 are hollow and each is sized to receive around peg1448 which extends from thelower surface1446 of thehead panel44 and spaced laterally from theround peg1444. To prevent thehead panel44 from being installed incorrectly, aguard1450 is positioned over thetubes1442, theguard1450 having anaperture1452 that aligns with theinboard tube1442. Asimilar guard1454 includes anaperture1456 which may be positioned over thetubes1440,1440 such that only theinboard tube1440 is accessible through theaperture1456. Theguards1450,1454 snap fit onto thetubes1442,1440, respectively.
Apanel1458 of thehead panel44 corresponds to the narrow width of the various deck sections of thehospital bed10. A wider version of ahead panel1460 has tworound pegs1462,1464 which each depend from alower surface1466; however adistance1463 between thepegs1462,1464 is greater than adistance1449 between thepegs1444,1448 ofhead panel44. Thehead panel44 is formed to include twonotches4260,4262 which each have anarrow gap4264,4266, respectively. Thenarrow gaps4264,4266 are positioned along avertical side4268,4270. Thenotches4260,4266 expand into alarger space4272,4274. The shape of thenotches4260,4262 allow lines are chords to be draped through the notch with thenarrow gaps4264,4266 resisting any movement of the lines are chords out of the notch. In this way thehead panel44 provides for line management. As an example, acord100 is shown in thenotch4260 inFIG. 5. Thewider head panel1460 has similar features as shown inFIG. 49.
Thefoot panel40 shown inFIG. 50 includes twoposts4280 and4282 that extend from alower surface4284 of thebody4286 of thefoot panel40. Thebody4286 is formed to include anupper rail4288 spans the width of thefoot panel40 with a continuous surface. However, twoprotrusions4290 and4292 extend upwardly from theupper rail4288. The protrusions are positioned and sized to prevent lines and cords from slipping over the edge of thebody4286 when laid over therail4288. Thefootboard40 includes twonotches4294 and4296 that have a similar structure in function as thenotches4260,4262 of thehead panel44.
As shown inFIG. 37, in use, thepatient support apparatus10 includes asupport surface1700 which is illustratively embodied as a mattress. Themattress1700 of the embodiment ofFIG. 37 includes acore1702 that is enclosed by a lower cover1704 and anupper cover1706. The lower cover1704 is connected to theupper cover1706 by a zipper as is known in the art. The core includes anupper body support1708 which is bounded by a pair of bolsters1710 and1712 along the longitudinal edges of theupper body support1708. Aperforated leg support1714 is secured to the bolsters1710,1712 as well as theupper body support1708. Theupper body support1708 is sized and positioned to support a patient's torso while theperforated leg support1714 supports the patient's legs on thefoot deck34. Afire barrier1716 is positioned over anupper surface1718 of thecore1702 when themattress1700 is assembled with portions of thefire barrier1716 being wrapped around under thebottom1720 of thecore1702, thefire barrier1716 have a construction which limits the propagation of a fire in thecore1702 if themattress1700 is accidentally ignited.
The lower cover1704 includes a pair ofmagnet pockets1722 and1724 sewn into the lower cover1704 and sized to receive a pair ofmagnets1726 and1728. When themagnets1726,1728 are positioned in thepocket1722,1724, themagnets1726,1728 magnetically secure thefoot end12 of themattress1700 to thefoot deck34. As will be described in further detail below, themattress1700 is secured to thehead deck28 at thehead end14 of themattress1700. If thefoot deck34 is extended or retracted as described above, themagnets1726,1728 maintain engagement of thefoot end12 of themattress1700 with thefoot deck34 throughout the range of motion. The perforations of thefoot support1714 permit thefoot support1714 to extend and retract with thefoot deck34.
As shown inFIG. 38, an exploded view of thecore1702 showing that thebody support1708 includes three layers. Anupper layer1730 is approximately 3 inches thick and is constructed of a foam material having an indention load deflection (“ILD”) of about 20. Anintermediate layer1732 is approximately 2 inches thick and is constructed of a foam material having an ILD of about 28. Alower layer1734 is approximately 1 inch thick and is constructed of a foam material having an ILD of approximately 45. It should be understood that structure of thebody support1708 may be different in other embodiments, including a variation in the number of layers and variations in the ILD of each of the layers.
In the embodiment ofFIG. 37, the lower cover1704 includes the magnet pockets1722,1724. In some embodiments, the body support1704 includes twoplates1740,1742 which are secured to alower surface1744 of thefoot support1714. Eachplate1740,1742 includes afirst tab1746 and asecond tab1748. As shown inFIG. 95, an alternativelower cover1750 includes fourpockets1752,1754,1756,1758 which are secured to anupper surface1760 of alower panel1762 of thecover1750. The first andsecond tabs1746,1748 are configured to be inserted into thepockets1752,1754,1756,1758 when the body support1704 is positioned in thelower cover1750. When thetabs1746,1748 of eachplate1740,1742 are positioned in therespective pockets1752,1754,1756,1758, the expansion and contraction of thefoot support1714 controls the gathering of the materials of thelower cover1750, and thefoot support1714 does not move relative to thelower cover1750 due to the connection between theplates1740,1742 andpockets1752,1754,1756, and1758. This approach to securing thefoot support1714 to its correspondinglower cover1750 could be used in any embodiment of mattress that includes a perforated foot support as disclosed herein.
As shown inFIG. 96, thefoot support1714 has alower height1766 at thefoot end12 of thefoot support1714 than theheight1768 at thehead end14 of thefoot support1714. Thelower height1766 provides relief for a patient's heel to be positioned lower than the patient's calves when the patient is supported on themattress1700 in a supine position. Anupper surface1770 of thefoot support1714 has an arcuate shape that defines a gradually declining height as thesurface1770 progresses from thehead end14 toward thefoot end12 of thefoot support1714.
In another embodiment, themattress1700 may be omitted and replaced with a different mattress structure, such as themattress1800 shown inFIG. 39. Themattress1800 includes acore1802 which comprises abladder assembly1804 which engages a foam frame1806. The foam frame1806 includes aperforated foot support1714 which is coupled to a pair of longitudinal bolsters1808 and1810. The longitudinal bolsters1808,1810 are interconnected by aheader1812 which extends laterally between the bolsters1808,1810 at thehead end14 of themattress1800. The longitudinal bolsters1808 and1810 are secured to theperforated foot support1714 such that thefoot support1714, bolsters1808 and1810, andheader1812 cooperate to define aspace1814 into which thebladder assembly1804 is positioned to form thecore1802. Themattress1800 includes alower cover1816 and anupper cover1818 which are secured together with a zipper as is known in the art. Thelower cover1816 includes a pair ofmagnet pockets1820 and1822 which receive a pair ofmagnets1824 and1826. Themagnets1824,1826 are positioned in thepockets1820,1822 and function similar to themagnets1726 and1728 discussed above.
As shown inFIGS. 52 and 53, thebladder assembly1804 includes eightbladders1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844. The bladders are arranged withbladder1830 positioned at thefoot end12 of thebladder assembly1804 andbladder1844 positioned at thehead end14. Eachbladder1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844 comprises anouter enclosure1846 of urethane coated nylon which provides an air impermeable enclosure. Inside of eachenclosure1846 is a twolayered foam structure1848 which includes anupper layer1850 and alower layer1852. Thelayers1850 and1852 are glued together. Thefoam structure1848 is deformable under load, but resiliently expands to fill the interior space of theenclosure1846.
At theleft side16 of eachenclosure1846 is a pressure relief orcheck valve1854. Each of thecheck valves1854 are configured to open when the pressure applied to the valve exceeds the relief pressure of the valve. In the arrangement of thebladder assembly1804, thevalves1854 are arranged such that when the pressure inside any one of theenclosures1846 is lower than the pressure of atmosphere, the correspondingvalve1854 opens to permit air to flow from atmosphere into theenclosure1846.
On theright side18 of thebladder assembly1804, eachenclosure1846 includes arespective outlet1856. Each of theoutlets1856 are connected to amanifold tube1858 so that theenclosures1846 are all in fluid communication with one another through theoutlets1856 andmanifold tube1858. Themanifold tube1858 terminates with apressure check valve1860. Thepressure check valve1860 is configured such that when the pressure in the manifold tube exceeds a relief pressure of thecheck valve1860, thecheck valve1860 opens to permit the venting of the pressure to atmosphere. It should be understood that thevalves1854, being check valves, do not permit a flow of air from theenclosures1846 through thevalves1854 to atmosphere. The only flow path for air from the enclosures to atmosphere is through themanifold tube1858 andpressure check valve1860. Similarly, the only path for that flow into any of theenclosures1846 is through arespective valve1854.
Thus, themattress1800 is self-adjusting to maintain the pressure within each of thebladders1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844 to a pressure below the relief pressure of thecheck valve1860. The operation of theinlet valves1854 anyparticular bladder1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844 which is unloaded, provides for the rapid filling of therespective bladder1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844 with air from atmosphere. This approach helps to regulate the pressure within thevarious bladders1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844 relatively quickly to control the support pressure experienced by a patient.
In the event that the patient exceeds the weight which can be supported by thebladder assembly1804 pneumatically, venting of the pressure in themanifold tube1858 andpressure check valve1860 permits the patient to be supported on thefoam structures1848 of eachbladder1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844. In this way, themattress1800 provides the benefits of a pneumatic mattress with safety for larger patients from bottoming out against the surface of the decks of thehospital bed10. It should be understood that thefoam structures1848 also serve the purpose of expanding theenclosures1846 to create the vacuum which draws air through thevalves1854 when aparticular bladder1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844 is unloaded.
In the illustrative embodiment,foam structures1848 have similar constructions. However, in some embodiments thelayers1850,1852 of thefoam structures1848 may have different properties indifferent bladders1830,1832,1834,1836,1838,1840,1842, and1844. In addition, thefoam structures1848 may be a single layer, or may include more than the twolayers1850,1852.
Themattress1800 further includes afire barrier assembly1862 which is wrapped around theentire core1802 to fully enclose thecore1802 in thefire barrier assembly1862. In addition, each of the longitudinal bolsters1808,1810 are formed to include a series ofrelief slits1864 positioned at the location in the longitudinal bolsters1808,1810 which are positioned at the intersection of thehead deck28 and the articulatedseat deck30. The relief slits1864 provide for expansion of the longitudinal bolsters1808,1810 when thehead deck28 is raised. With therelief slits1864, little material is removed, but the foam is permitted to expand at the location of theslits1864. In contrast, a series ofcutouts1866 are positioned at the interface between the articulatedseat deck30 and thefoot deck34. Thecutouts1866 are generally triangular with more material removed at a lower surface1868 of the longitudinal bolsters1808,1810, thecutouts1866 becoming narrower to a termination spaced apart from the lower surface1868. Thecutouts1866 provide for both expansion and collapsing of the length of the longitudinal bolsters1808,1810 at the interface between the articulatedseat deck30 and thefoot deck34. The removed material at the surface1868 permits thecutouts1866 to collapse when thefoot deck34 is moved downwardly relative to the articulatedseat deck30 such that the material of the longitudinal bolsters1808,1810 does not bulge.
In still another embodiment shown inFIG. 40, amattress1900 may be used in place ofmattress1700. Themattress1900 includes abody support1902 and a foot support1904. Thebody support1902 supports amicroclimate management structure1906. In addition, themattress1900 includes a mattress turning structure1908 which is configured to cause rotation of the mattress assembly about a longitudinal axis1910.
As shown inFIG. 87, thebody support1902 comprises a two layer structure that includes a number of air chambers arranged into anupper layer1912 and alower layer1914 with eachlayer1912,1914 being divided into ahead zone1916 and aseat zone1918. In theupper layer1912, thebody support1902 includes sixchambers1920. In thelower layer1914, thehead section1916 includes sevenchambers1922. In theupper layer1912, theseat zone1918 includes ninechambers1924. Thelower layer1914, the seat zone also includes ninechambers1926. It should be noted that theseat zone1918 and thehead zone1916 do not correspond with the respective articulatedseat deck30 andhead deck28. Rather, as shown diagrammatically inFIG. 87, thehead deck28 underlies thechambers1922 in thelower layer1914 ofhead zone1920. However, two of thechambers1926 of thelower layer1914 of the seat zone are supported on thehead deck28 with the remaining ninechambers1926 being supported on the articulatedseat deck30 and fixedseat deck32.
When thehead deck28 is moved upwardly, a portion of a patient's lower back and the patient's hips are supported on two of thechambers1924 of theupper layer1912 ofseat zone1918. It has been found that the potential for excessive interface pressure upon a patient's skin is controlled best when the lower back and hips are at the same pressure, such as the pressure ofseat zone1918, as opposed to having the pressure in thehead section1916 extend to the patient's hip line. It should be understood that the reference to thehead zone1916 does not limit the function of thehead zone1916, as thehead zone1916 supports both a patient's head the patient's shoulders and upper back.
It should be understood that theupper chambers1924 andlower chambers1926 of theseat zone1918 are all in fluid communication. Similarly, theupper chambers1920 andlower chambers1922 of theseat zone1916 are all in fluid communication. Thebody support1902 is formed by RF welding a urethane coated nylon material to form the various seams and chambers, while also securing theupper layer1912 to thelower layer1914. Thelower layer1914 includes a perimeter weld1928. Theupper layer1912 also includes aperimeter weld1930, as well as alateral weld1932 that separates thehead zone1916 from theseat zone1918. A similar weld1934 is formed in thelower layer1914 to separate thehead zone1916 from theseat zone1918. The chambers of theseat zone1918 are in fluid communication throughchannels1936 and1938 on the lateral sides of thezone1918. Thehead zone1916 includessimilar channels1940 and1942. Thechambers1924 are formed by a number ofwelds1944 which traverse the width of thezone1918 between the channels1936 in1938. Thewelds1944 cause atop material1946 of thelayer1912 to be secured to alower material1948 of theupper layer1912, while allowing the spaces between the welds to be expanded to form thechambers1924.
Thehead zone1916 also includes a number ofwelds1944 which span the lateral space between thechannels1940 and1942, causing the formation of thechambers1920. It should be understood that thelower chambers1926 ofzone1918 andlower chambers1922 ofzone1916, are formed in a similar fashion with welds spanning between chambers positioned on the lateral sides of therespective zones1916,1918 to allow the chambers to communicate with one another.
In theupper layer1912, the areas where thewelds1944 are applied are processed after welding to create relief betweenadjacent chambers1920 or1924, to allow thechambers1920 or1924 to move relative to one another. For example, everyweld1944 is cut in either two or three places to create smallconnected segments1950 between adjacent cuts in the respective weld1934. Referring toFIG. 87, afirst weld1944 is has threecuts1954 such that twosegments1950 remain. Inadjacent weld1944, there are only two1952 cuts leaving asegment1950 centered in theweld1944. Eachcut1952,1954 is terminated each end with a relief1956 that is circular to reduce the potential for a stress riser and resultant tearing through the weld. By alternating the pattern of cuts betweencuts1952 and1954,adjacent chambers1920 or1924 have some potential for flexure relative to one another, but are maintained in a generally aligned orientation. It should be understood that in other embodiments, the number of cuts along the welds may be varied to vary the performance of thebladder assembly1902.
Both theupper layer1912 and thelower layer1914 include a number offlaps1960,1962, respectively, that are welded together to form a mountingstructure1964 which is used to secure thebladder assembly1902 to other structures of themattress1900. Eachstructure1964 includes asnap1966 which is welded to theflanges1960,1962, thesnap1966 being configured to engage amating structure1968 seen inFIG. 40. In addition, thestructure1964 forms aloop1970 through which pneumatic lines are routed along the length of thebladder assembly1902.
The pneumatic connection between theupper layer1912 andlower layer1914 is accomplished by connecting theport1974 on thetop side1976 ofbottom layer1914 with acorresponding port1978 on thebottom side1980 of thetop layer1912 to form thehead zone1916 with the twolayers1912 and1914. Theseat zone1918 swarmed by connecting theport1982 in thebottom side1976 of thelower layer1914 to theport1984 thebottom surface1980 of thelayer1912.
Thebody support1902 is secured to afoam structure1990 with thesnaps1966 that corresponded to threeprotrusions1968 being secured to aplate1994 that is secured to alower foam layer1992. Acorresponding plate1994 is positioned out of view inFIG. 40 on theleft side16 of thefoam structure1990 and connects toadditional snaps1966. The foot support1904 includes a pair of plates1996 which are secured to a foam base1998 of the foot support1904. Threeprotrusions1968 are secured to the plate1996 and engage threeadditional snaps1966 on thebody support1902. Another plate1996 is positioned out of view inFIG. 40, but also secures thebody support1902 through the interaction ofsnaps1966 withprotrusions1968. Thestructure1990 includes aheader2000 and a pair ofside beams2002 and2004, with theheader2000 andside beams2002,2004 being secured to thefoam layer1992.
The foot support1904 includes a perforated section2006 which is secured to the foam base1998 and a pair of side beams2008 and2010. The foam layers1992 and1998 provide some protection from a patient bottoming out against the surfaces of the various decks of thehospital bed10 if thepatient support1902 were to experience a catastrophic failure and deflate. In addition, thefoam layers1992 and1998 provide structural support for other portions of themattress1900.
Themicroclimate management structure1906 is configured to overlie thebody support1902 with anexhaust region2012 being positioned in the general vicinity of a patient's buttocks and thighs. As will be described in further detail below, the flow of air pushed into themicroclimate management structure1906 through aninlet2014 is exhausted through theexhaust region2012 to cause airflow within the mattress underneath of the patient's buttocks and thighs to help move moisture away from the patient's skin and provide some cooling of the patient's skin. Themicroclimate management structure1906 includes a plurality of thru-holes2016 on each lateral side which cooperate to engage theprotrusions1968 so that thesnaps1966 capture portions of themicroclimate management structure1906 to secure themicroclimate management structure1906 relative to thefoam structure1990 and the foot support1904. Theinlet2014 traverses between thebody support1902 and the perforated section2006 of the foot support1904 and past of the foam base1998 to be engaged by aninlet tube2018 that is connected to a manifold as will be discussed in further detail below. A high volume of air is transferred through theinlet tube2018 and flows into themicroclimate management structure1906 and out of theexhaust region2012.
The mattress turning structure1908 includes a head end turn structure2030 and a footend turn structure2032. The turn structure2030 includes a leftturn bladder assembly2034 and a rightturn bladder assembly2036. Theturn bladder assemblies2034,2036 include alower chamber2038 anupper chamber2040, the twochambers2038,2040 having an opening there between so that thebladder assembly2034 functions as a single unit. Thechambers2038,2040 are shaped to control the gathering and expansion of the material of thebladder assembly2034 during inflation and deflation. Thebladder assembly2034 includes anupper retainer2042 and alower retainer2042 that cooperate to retain thebladder assembly2034 relative to a Z-plate assembly2044. Thelower retainer2042 has one end positioned in a slot2060 and the opposite end positioned in a slot2062 in thelower plate2046. Theupper retainer2042 is secured to theintermediate plate2048 in a similar manner.
The z-plate assembly2044 includes alower plate2046 that is connected to anintermediate plate2048 through ahinge2050. Anupper plate2052 is connected to theintermediate plate2048 by ahinge2054. Thebladder assembly2036 is secured to theupper plate2052 and theintermediate plate2048. When a turn assist function of themattress1900 is not engaged, thechambers2038,2040 of thebladder assemblies2034,2036 collapse so that the Z-plate assembly2044 collapses into a flat orientation and permits themattress1900 to be supported on thehospital bed10 for normal use.
The footend turn structure2032 is constructed similar to the head end turn structure2030, with the difference being the size of the members of the plates of a Z-plate assembly2064 and a corresponding difference in the size of thebladder assemblies2066 and2068. Thebladder assembly2066 is part of a left turn zone along with thebladder assembly2034 and thebladder assembly2068 is part of a right turn zone along with thebladder assembly2036. The Z-plate assembly2064 includes alower plate2070 connected to anintermediate plate2072 by ahinge2074. Theintermediate plate2072 is connected to anupper plate2076 by ahinge2078. Each of thebladder assemblies2066,2068 has alower retainer2042 and anupper retainer2042 which retain thebladder assemblies2066,2068 to theplates2070,2072,2076 of theplate assembly2064.
Themattress1900 includes a lower cover2080 with afirst pocket2082 and asecond pocket2084. Referring to the diagrammatic representation inFIG. 41, thelower plate2046 of the z-plate assembly2044 is positioned in the pocket with thehinge2050 below alower sheet2086 of the cover2080. Theleft turn bladder2034 is positioned between thelower plate2046 and theintermediate plate2048 and the rightturn bladder assembly2036 is positioned between theintermediate plate2048 and theupper plate2052. Thefoam plate1992 is positioned over the Z-plate assembly2044. In operation, to cause a patient to be turned to their right, theleft turn bladder2034 is inflated while theright turn bladder2036 is remained uninflated. This causes theintermediate plate2048 to pivot about thehinge2050 as indicated by arrow2085 causing theleft side16 of themattress1900 to be lifted to cause the patient to be rotated to facilitate the changing of the patient's linens or access to the patient's back. In use, a turn assist function is engaged to move the patient to a rolled position, and then the respective turn assist bladder is deflated while the caregiver holds the patient in the rotated position. It should be understood that when a turn to the patient's left is desired, thebladder assembly2036 is inflated to cause theupper plate2052 to pivot about thehinge2054.
In the foregoing discussion, the operation of the turn assembly2030 has been described. It should be understood that the operation of theturn assembly2032 is similar and is coordinated with the operation of the turn assembly2030, with of thebladder assemblies2034 and2066 being a left turn bladders zone and thebladder assemblies2036 and2068 being a right turn zone. While in the illustrative embodiment theturn assemblies2030 and2032 cooperate, in some embodiments each of thebladder assemblies2036,2038,2066,2068 may be independently operable to cause rotation of a portion of the patient's body on thebody support1902. In such a case, each of thebladder assemblies2036,2038,2066,2068 would have to be operated as an independent zone.
As will be discussed in further detail below, amattress turning structure3425 includesassemblies3426,3448, and3452 and each is independently operable to cause a portion of a mattress to be rotated to one side. Rotation of the mattress provides assistance to a caregiver in changing the linens on the mattress when a patient is supported on the mattress. In addition, a caregiver may turn a patient to improve access to various portions of the patient's body. In use, theturn assembly3426 may be activated to move the patient to a new position and deactivated while the patient is held in position to cause the mattress to move away from the patient. In some cases, theturn assembly3426 may be used to provide continuous lateral rotation therapy (CLRT) to a patient. By rotating the patient from side to side, the patient is less prone to experience pulmonary complications associated with long-term hospital bed10 ridden status. While themattress1900 includes a pneumatic system, an alternative arrangement of a turning structure is disclosed inFIGS. 131-136 that may be used with a mattress that does not have an active pneumatic system, such asmattress1700 ormattress1800, for example. A block diagram of ahospital bed103410 shown inFIG. 132 shows that thehospital bed103410 includes acontrol system3424 and threeturn assemblies3426.
In the illustrative embodiment, thecontrol system3424 includes acontroller3430, auser interface3432, apump3434, asensor assembly3428, and aflow control assembly3436. Thecontroller3430 includes aprocessor3438 and amemory device3440. Theprocessor3438 receives inputs from theuser interface3432 and thesensor assembly3428, utilizes instructions stored in thememory device3440 to operateturn assemblies3426,3448, and3452.
Referring now toFIG. 131, thehospital bed10 is shown with the mattress removed to expose the threeseparate turn assemblies3426,3448, and3452 positioned on deck sections of thehospital bed10. Afirst turn assembly3426 is positioned on ahead deck section3446, thesecond turn assembly3448 is positioned on aseat deck section3450, and thethird turn assembly3452 is supported on athigh deck section3454. In the illustrative embodiment there is no turn assembly on the foot deck section3455, but in other embodiments further turn assemblies may be included. Each of theturn assemblies3426,3448, and3452 are independently operable under the control of thecontroller3430. The functionality of each of theturn assemblies3426,3448, and3452 are similar. The following discussion regarding the structure and operation ofturn assembly3426 is equally applicable to theturn assemblies3448 and3452, with the principle difference being the size of the components of theturn assemblies3448 and3452 modified to fit therespective deck sections3450 and3454. Theturn assemblies3426,3448, and3452 are releasably secured to thedeck sections3446,3450, and3454 and theturn assemblies3426,3448, and3452 may be added independently of the nature of the mattress, allowing the turn function to be added or retrofitted to existinghospital bed10s. In some cases, thecontrol system3424 may be independent of the control structure of thehospital bed103410 to operate theturn assemblies3426,3448, and3452.
Theturn assembly3426 includes a hinged support plate assembly3464 (shown inFIG. 136) which has twohinges3456 and3458 that definerespective pivot axes3460 and3462. Thehinges3456 and3458 are positioned on opposite sides of the hingedsupport plate assembly3464 so that the pivot axes3460 and3462 lie parallel to the longitudinal length of thehospital bed103410 on opposite sides. Theturn assembly3426 does not require the patient to be centered on the mattress to achieve maximum rotation angles as is the case with mattresses that have integral turn bladders. The entire mattress is turned providing a uniform rotation angle across the mattress.
A pair ofinflatable bladders3466 and3468 is positioned between anupper plate3470 and anintermediate plate3472 of the hingedsupport plate assembly3464 and a second pair ofbladders3474 and3476 is positioned between theintermediate plate3472 and alower plate3478 as shown inFIGS. 133-135. It should be understood that theplates3470,3472, and3478 are rigid structures constructed of a resin composite and sufficiently stiff to transfer the load between the interface between the bladders and the plates over the entire plate structure.
Referring again now toFIG. 131, eachbladder3466,3468,3474, or3476 is secured to anadjacent plate3470,3472, or3478 by arespective strap3480 that is secured to the bladder and extends through an opening at one end of therespective plate3470,3472, or3478 and lies on the side of therespective plate3470,3472, or3478 opposite the bladder for a length and is then extends through another opening to reengage the bladder. The interaction of thestrap3480, the bladder, and the respective plate secures the bladder relative to the plate. For example, referring now to thebladder3466 shown inFIG. 131, thestrap3480, which is secured to thebladder3466, extends through afirst opening3482. Thestrap3480 traverses thesurface3484 of theupper plate3470 and then extend back through theplate3470 through anopening3486 where it is secured to thebladder3480. The engagement of thestrap3480 with theplate3470 maintains the position of thebladder3480 relative to theplate3470.
Thehinges3456 and3458 are formed by brackets secured to the plates that are engaged by a rod. For example, as shown inFIG. 136,hinge3458 is formed by abracket3488 which is secured tointermediate plate3472 and abracket3490 which is secured tolower plate3478. Thebrackets3488 and3490 engage so that several in eachbracket3488 and3490 align along thepivot axis3462 so that a rod3492 can be slid along thepivot axis3462 to secure thebracket3488 and3490. Thebrackets3488 and3490 are movable relative to one another by pivoting on the rod3492 relative to one another to change an angle between theintermediate plate3472 and thelower plate3478.
While the upper plate is always in contact with alower surface3494 of the mattress (seeFIG. 133), depending on which of thebladders3466,3468,3474, or3476 is inflated, the mattress is rotated about eitheraxis3460 or3462. Thebladders3466,3468,3474, or3476 are each constructed of a urethane coated nylon weave that is ultrasonically welded to form a closed volume that is in communication with theflow control assembly3436. Referring toFIG. 132, theflow control assembly3436 includes solenoid actuated valves that open and close to either cause pressurized air from thepump3434 to be directed to therespective bladder3466,3468,3474, or3476 or to cause therespective bladder3466,3468,3474, or3476 to be vented to atmosphere. Eachbladder3466,3468,3474, and3476 also has an opening that is fluid communication with a line that communicates the fluid pressure in thebladder3466,3468,3474, or3476 back to a piezoelectric pressure sensor (not shown) that measures the pressure in therespective bladder3466,3468,3474, or3476. This pressure is used by thecontroller3430 to determine an amount of inflation of thebladder3466,3468,3474, or3476. The pressure in therespective bladder3466,3468,3474, or3476 is indicative of the angle of pivoting of therespective plates3472 and78 about therespective axes3460 and3462.
Referring now the diagrammatic representation ofFIG. 133, viewing theturn assembly3426 from thehead end3496 of thehospital bed103410, theupper plate3470 overlies theupper bladder3466 andlower bladder3468. As shown inFIG. 131, the upper bladder is secured to theupper plate3470 by thestrap3480. Thelower bladder3468 is secured to theintermediate plate3472 in similar manner. Thehinge3456 is positioned lie along the patient'sleft side3498 of the mattress and just below thelower surface3484 of the mattress. Inflation of thebladders3466 and3468 causes theupper plate3470 to pivot about thehinge3456 so that theupper plate3470 and mattress pivot about theaxis3460 to the patient's left. Thus, while thebladders3466 and3468 are positioned on the patient's right side of thehospital bed103410, they are effectively left turn bladders as they cause the mattress and the patient to be turned to the left.
Similarly, the upperright turn bladder3474 and the lowerright turn bladder3476 are positioned on the patient's left and positioned between theintermediate plate3472 and thelower plate3478. Inflation of thebladders3474 and3476 will cause theintermediate plate3472,upper plate3470,hinge3456 and mattress to rotate to the patient's right as theintermediate plate3472 pivots about theaxis3462.
In operation, a user will utilize theuser interface3432 to engage theturn assembly3426 by choosing an option from a touchscreen menu or activating a hard-key on theuser interface3432 to cause theturn assembly3426 to turn. In the illustrative embodiment, the input is a momentary input that requires the user to hold the input to cause theturn assembly3426 to operate. For example, if a caregiver were to desire to turn a patient to the patient's left, the caregiver would push and hold a left turn input until theturn assembly3426 effects the desired position of the caregiver. A second input is activated to lower theturn assembly3426. Similar inputs are present for the right turn function as well. In other embodiments, the user/caregiver is able to input a desired amount of turn to be achieved and thecontroller3430 operates theair system3442 to automatically achieve the desired turn. In still other embodiments, the user/caregiver may be able to initiate a CLRT therapy routine to automatically and continuously operate theturn assembly3426 to rotate the patient continuously.
Once thecontroller3430 has received an input indicative of a desired turn, thecontroller3430 determines which of thebladders3466,3468,3474, and/or3476 should be inflated. Thecontroller3430 operates thepump3434 which is a blower that outputs relatively high pressure. The illustrative embodiment is part number AMP45-DC-ID available from Moog Components Group, 1213 North Main Street, Blacksburg, Va. and develops an output pressure of up to 103.0 cm-H2O. Other embodiments may utilize a compressor or other source of pressurized air. The flow from thepump3434 is transmitted through aconduit3498 to theflow control assembly3436. Theflow control assembly3436 is a manifold with a number of solenoid controlled valves (not shown) that control the flow from thepump3434 through one of fourconduits3500,3502,3504, and3506 to the fourbladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 respectively. The valves of theflow control assembly3436 are operated by thecontroller3430. In addition, the valves may be operated to permit the air in thebladders3466,3468,3474, or3476 to be vented to atmosphere to deflate thebladders3466,3468,3474, or3476. In other embodiments, theflow control assembly3436 may be operable to reverse the flow through thepump3434 such that the air in thebladders3466,3468,3474, or3476 is vacuumed from thebladders3466,3468,3474, or3476 to quickly lower theturn assembly3426.
The pressure in each of thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 is independently monitored by a respective dedicated piezoelectric pressure sensor in thesensor assembly3428. The pressure is measured distally to reduce the potential for pressure spikes. There are fourconduits3508,3510,3512, and3514 which are each respectively associated with thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476. Theconduits3508,3510,3512, and3514 are in fluid communication with therespective bladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 so that the pressure in thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 is transferred through theconduits3508,3510,3512, and3514 to the respective sensors. By measuring the pressure in each of thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476, the amount of rotation of theturn assembly3426 can be determined. In other embodiments, additional sensors may be utilized to measure rotation. For example, a potentiometer could be connected between hinge components to determine the amount of rotation. In still other embodiments, an accelerometer could be mounted onupper plate3470 to measure the amount of rotation.
As shown inFIG. 134, when fully inflated,bladders3466 and3468 affect 30° of rotation. It should be understood that individual inflation of each of thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 may allow various orientations of rotation to be achieved. In addition, inflation of all of thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 could cause the mattress to be raised if so desired. Thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 are individually inflatable so that the rate of rotation can be controlled and to control the interface between thebladders3466 and3468 or3474 and3476. For example, inFIG. 135 it can be seen thatbladder3474 is inflated to a greater degree thanbladder3476 to reduce the engaged surface between the bladders. It should be noted that the bladder pairs3466,3468 and3474,3476 are not interconnected and are therefore moveable relative to each other during operation of theturn assembly3426. This reduces the chances for damage to thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476 that might occur if theturn assembly3426 was loaded in an unexpected manner.
A further benefit of the stacked bladder approach disclosed herein is that thebladders3466,3468,3474, and3476, being smaller than prior art arrangements for turning bladders, are able to facilitate larger turn angles more quickly and with less air than prior art arrangements. In testing, rotation angles of up to 50° have been achieved with average rotation rates of 1° per second. It should be noted that thebladders3466 and3468 are spaced apart from thehinge3458 by adistance3514 such that atriangular space3516 is formed between thebladders3466 and3468, theintermediate plate3472 and theupper plate3470. Similarly,bladders3474 and3476 are spaced apart fromhinge3456 by a distance3518 such that a triangular space3520 is formed between thebladders3474 and3476 and theintermediate plate3472 andlower plate3478.
The bottom cover2028 is further formed to include anopening2088 formed in thesheet2086. Theopening2088 communicates withfabric tube2090 through which various tubes and lines are routed from themattress1900 to an air control box2200 (seeFIG. 30). For example theinlet tube2018 that feeds themicroclimate management structure1906 is routed through theopening2088 and thefabric tube2090. A headzone supply tube2092 is fed through theopening2088 and thefabric tube2090 with an end of the headzone supply tube2092 being coupled to aport2094 on the bottom of thelayer1914 of thebody support1902. Aseat support tube2096 attaches to aport2098 on the bottom of thelower layer1914 and is fed through theopening2088 andfabric tube2090. Asense tube2100 is coupled to aport2102 on thebottom side1980 of theupper layer1912. Thesense tube2100 provides a pathway for a pressure transducer to sense the pressure in thehead zone1916. Thefoot sense tube2104 is coupled to aport2106 which is also on thebottom1980 of theupper layer1912. Similarly, a right turn bladders supplytube2110 includesconnectors2112 and2114 which connect to thebladder assemblies2068 and2036, respectively. A right turnbladder sense tube2116 couples to thebladder assembly2036 provide a source for pressure transducer to sense the pressure in theturn bladder assemblies2036 and2068. A left turn bladders supplytube2118 includes aconnector2120 in theconnector2122 which connect to thebladder assemblies2066 and2034, respectively. A leftturn sense tube2124 connects to thebladder assembly2034 to provide a source for sensing the pressure in thebladder assemblies2066 and2034. Each of thetubes2110,2116,2118, and2124 also are fed through theopening2088 and through thefabric tube2090.
Themattress1900 is secured to thehead deck28 andfoot deck34 of thehospital bed10 by the interaction of fourlocking knobs2126 withslots2128,2130 formed in thefoot deck34 andslots2132 and2134 formed in thehead deck28. Each of the slots is key-hole shaped with around opening2136 and aslot2138. The locking knobs2126 are each positioned through theround opening2136 and slid into theslot2138 to secure therespective knob2126 to therespective deck28,34. Theknobs2126 at thefoot end12 are secured byfasteners2140 andwashers2142 which are positioned on thesheet2086 of the bottom cover2080. At thehead end14, aplate2144 is positioned on abottom surface2146 of the bottom cover2080 and the lockingknobs2126 are secured to theplate2144.
The bottom cover2080 includes threeopenings2148,2150,2152 which permit its air that is exhausted through theexhaust region2012 of themicroclimate management structure1906 to escape through thehead end14 of themattress1900. Theopenings2148,2150, and2152 are each covered on the exterior by arespective flap2149,2151,2153 (seen inFIG. 79) which is RF welded over the opening on the sides and top such that only the open bottom provides a path for the flow of air out of the lower cover2080. Themattress1900 also includes anupper cover2154 which is zippered to the lower cover2080 enclosing the various components of themattress1900 therein. Afire barrier2156 encloses all of the components other than the lower cover2080 and theupper cover2154 when themattress1900 is assembled.
In addition,mattress1900 includes a pair ofposts2160,2162 that extend through abottom surface2146 of the cover2080 and engage thelower plate2070 of the Z-plate assembly2064. Theposts2160,2162 are cylindrical and extend downwardly from thesurface2146 to engage the fixedseat deck32 at thepoints2164 and2166 indicated onFIG. 8. Theposts2160,2162 are free to float between thefixed seat deck32 andhead deck28 as thehead deck28, articulatedseat deck30, andfoot deck34 each move relative to theload frame26. During extension of thefoot deck34, theposts2160,2162 engaged the fixedseat deck32 to resist movement of themattress1900 toward thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10.
As shown inFIG. 31, a diagrammatic representation of the pneumatic portion of theairbox2200 includes a manifold2168 in a fluid communication with ablower2170, the blower having apositive pressure outlet2172 and anegative pressure inlet2174. In addition, theairbox2200 includes afilter2178 through which air is drawn to thenegative pressure inlet2174. Thepositive pressure outlet2172 feeds aconduit2176. Theconduit2176 feeds afirst valve2180 that controls flow to and from thehead zone1916 of thebody support1902 through thesupply tube2092. Asecond valve2182 controls the flow to and from theseat zone1918 through thesupply tube2096. Both of thevalves2180 and2182 are movable between an opened and a closed position to connect therespective zones1916 and1918 to theconduit2176 as necessary. Theconduit2176 also feeds atap2184 that is connected to aconduit2186 through acheck valve2188. When the pressure in theconduit2176 is of sufficient pressure to overcome thecheck valve2188, thecheck valve2188 will open and allow flow to theconduit2186 which feeds twovalves2190, associated with theleft turn zone2031, and2192, associated withright turn zone2033. In addition,conduit2176 is connected to avalve2194 which is associated with themicroclimate management structure1906. Anotherconduit2196 is connected to a second port on each of theturn valves2190,2192 and is connected to theinlet2174 of theblower2170. As will be described in further detail, each of thezones1916,1918,2031,2033 may be exhausted through thevalve2194, with theturn zones2031,2033 being subjected to a rapid evacuation through the use of thenegative pressure inlet2174 of theblower2170 to draw air from thezones2031,2033 through therespective valves2190,2192.
Thezones1916,1918 may be vented through thevalve2194 andmicroclimate management structure1906 if theblower2170 is idle such that the pressure in theconduit2176 is lower than the pressure in thezones1916 and1918. Opening of thevalve2194 permits air from thezones1916 and1919 to flow through theconduit2176 through thevalve2194 andinlet tube2018 to escape through themicroclimate management structure1906.
Venting of theturn zones2031,2033 utilizes the three-way valve structure ofvalves2190,2192 to connect therespective feed tubes2116 or2110 to theconduit2196 so that the inlet side of theblower2170 pulls air through theconduits2116,2110 into theconduit2196 and, thereby, theinlet2174 of theblower2170. In certain conditions, thevalves2190 or2192 may be positioned to allow air to be drawn from therespective zone2031 or2033 into theinlet2174 of theblower2170 and fed to one of theother zones1916 or1918. However, if no flow is needed to either thezones1916 or1918, the flow from theturn zones2031 or2033 is simply exhausted through thevalve2194 to themicroclimate management structure1906. Under certain conditions, the pressure in theturn zones2031,2033 may exceed the pressure in another zone, such as theother turn zone2031 or2033, or thehead zone1916 orseat zone1918. This may be a result of the weight of a patient and the leverage provided by the Z-plate assemblies2044 and2064 to urge their out of thebladder assemblies2036,2034,2066, or2068. To protect against damage to thebody support1902, both thehead zone1916 andseat zone1918 include arespective check valve2095 and2099 positioned on abottom surface2097 of thelower layer1914. Thecheck valves2095,2099 open at a relief pressure that is higher than the maximum operating pressure of thebody support1902, but lower than the pressure which components of thebody support1902 would fail due to excessive pressure. While the turn zones operate at pressures higher than the typical operating pressures of thebody support1902, the presence of thecheck valves2095,2099 mitigate the potential for a damaging overpressure condition to occur if the turn zones are vented through themicroclimate management system1906 and the flow is constricted sufficiently to cause an overpressure condition in thebody support1902.
Anair control board2198 positioned in the air control box2200 (seen inFIG. 30) includes logic that is operable to take pressure readings from the manifold2168 or any one of thezones1916,1918,2031, or2033 to determine which of thevalves2180,2182,2190,2192, or2194 to open or adjust to achieve the flow necessary to meet the operational requirements of themattress1900. As described above, thehead zone1916 is connected to asense tube2100 which connects to apressure sensor2202, thepressure sensor2202 providing a signal to the logic of theair control board2198 indicative of the pressure in thehead zone1916. Similarly, thesense line2096 is connected to apressure transducer2204 which provides a signal to the logic indicative of the pressure in theseat zone1918. Thesense tube2116 provides a signal to apressure transducer2206 indicative of the pressure in theright turn zone2033 and thesense tube2124 is connected to apressure transducer2208 for determining the pressure in theleft turn zone2031. Theconduit2176 is coupled to asense line2210 that is also connected to apressure transducer2212, thepressure transducer2212 providing the logic a signal indicative of the pressure in theconduit2176.
As shown inFIG. 30, theairbox2200 includes anupper enclosure2214 which supports theblower2170, manifold2168, andair board2198. Acover2216 is secured to theupper enclosure2214 to encase the components of theairbox2200. Theblower2170 includes theinlet2174 and theoutlet2172 which feeds theconduit2176. Theblower2170 is supported in aframe2218 on a number of isolation mounts2200 which are secured to the blower by nuts2222. Thecontrol board2198 is mounted on a number ofstandoffs2224 and secured byscrews2226. Acable assembly2228 includes a Hall-effect sensor2230 which is positioned to detect the connection of a connector for the tubes of themattress1900 as will be discussed in further detail below. A gasket2231 is positioned between anoutlet panel2232 and the manifold2168 to form a seal between various ports of the manifold2168 and thepanel2232. The manifold2168 is secured to the panel by a number of screws2234 and washers2236. Thefilter2178 is mounted on aframe cover2238 which overlies theframe2218 supporting theblower2170. While shown with thecover2216 at the top ofFIG. 30, when installed theupper enclosure2214 is positioned just below thepanel772 offirst portion36 offoot deck34 and thecover2216 is vertically below theupper enclosure2214.
When thevalves2190 and2192 are closed, air is drawn through thefilter2178 into the space defined by theframe2218 andframe cover2238 and fed to theblower2170. Thecover2216 is formed to include avent2240 through which ambient air is drawn into thefilter2178.Gasket2242 is positioned between thecover2216 and theupper enclosure2214 provides an airtight seal for the interior space of theairbox2200. Thecover2216 is secured to the base by a number ofscrews2244. Theport cover2246 is pivotably coupled to thecover2216 bypins2248 and2250. A pair ofsprings2252 bias thecover2246 to a closed position which overlies the ports on the manifold2186 that extend through thepanel2232 to prevent ingress of any debris when theairbox2200 is not in use. The spring-loadedcover2246 may be opened to engage with the connector secured to the end of thefabric tube2090 which engages the ports of the manifold2168 to secure the tubes from themattress1900 to themanifold2168.
In some embodiments, thebody support1902 is omitted and analternative embodiment2260 shown inFIGS. 42-43 is used. Thebody support2260 includes an upper layer2262 and a lower layer2264. The layers2262,2264 are divided into ahead zone2266 and athigh zone2268. The upper layer2262 of the head zone includes a number ofchambers2270 while the lower layer2264 of the head'send2266 has a number ofchambers2272. The upper layer2262 of thethigh zone2268 comprises a number ofchambers2274 while the lower layer2264 of the thigh zone includes a number ofchambers2276. Thebody support2260 includes an additionallumbar zone2278 which is positioned in thethigh zone2268 and includes asingle chamber2280 in the upper layer2262 and twochambers2282,2282 positioned in the lower layer2264. Thelumbar zone2278 is inflated as thehead deck28 is articulated upwardly as indicated by thearrow2284 to allow thebody support2260 to expand due to the articulation of thehead deck28. Thechambers2280 and2282 are inflated in proportion to the angle of thehead deck28 to fill a space that is created when thehead deck28 moves away from the fixedseat deck32. Referring again now toFIGS. 30-31, thezone2278 is fed by atube2286 from avalve2288 which is connected to theconduit2176. Asense line2290 connects thezone2278 to a pressure transducer2292 on the air can controlboard2198. Thevalve2288 functions similarly to thevalves2180 and2182 and under the control of theair control board2198 is operated to inflate thezone2278 as necessary.
As shown inFIG. 44, theairbox2200 is secured to thefirst portion36 of thefoot deck34 such that thepanel2232 is positioned just below thesurface772 which has an opening2294 which provides access to theairbox2200 from above thepanel772.
Theair control box2200 is mounted to thefirst portion36 of thefoot deck34 so that the ports of the manifold2168 are accessible through thehole2324 in thepan772 as shown inFIG. 44.FIGS. 45A-45C shows that theairbox2200 is suspended from thefirst portion36 byisolators3676 which are secured byfasteners3678. Referring toFIG. 45C andisolator3676 is not visible in the right side of the figure, but thefasteners3678 secure an L-bracket3682 the isolator and the L-bracket is secured to therail748 of thefirst portion36 by afastener3682. The structure of the mounting of theairbox2200 to thefirst portion36 utilizes a fully mechanically isolated arrangement such that any vibration induced in the components in theairbox2200 is not transferred to thefoot deck34.
When theairbox2200 is not present, a cover2296 (seen inFIG. 16) is positioned in the opening2294 and retained by a snap fit to provide a generally continuous surface across thepanel772. In the embodiment ofFIG. 44, acover2298 is positionable over the opening2294 to provide support to thefoot support1714. Thecover2298 has a number of lateral ribs2300 which span a width of thecover2298 and provide strength to support thefoot support1714. Thecover2298 has an aperture formed there through which permits aconnector2302 to pass through thecover2298 and engages the ports of the manifold2168 that extend through thepanel2232. Thefabric tube2090 is secured to thecover2298 with the various tubes extending through thefabric tube2090 and secured to barbs connectors on theconnector2302. In the illustrative embodiment ofFIG. 44, thelumbar zone2278 is not present so the associatedtubes2290 and2286 are not present. However, thesense lines2096,2100,2116, and2124 are secured to theconnector2232 and engagerespective ports2304,2306 (not shown),2308, and2310 that extend from thepanel2232. Thetube2018 connects to theconnector2302 such that engages theport2312 of themanifold2168. The headzone supply tube2092 and footzone supply tube2096 are also secured to theconnector2302 and communicate toports2314 and2316, respectively, of themanifold2168. A left turnzone supply tube2116 and right turnzone supply tube2110 are also both connected toconnector2302 and connected toports2318 and2320, respectively.
To connect theconnector2302 to theairbox2200, thepivotable cover2246 is pivoted downwardly on thepins2248,2250. Theconnector2302 has a pin2322 that extends from both of the sides of the connector and defines arotational axis2324. Each of the pins2322 are positioned in aslot2324 formed in atab2326 that extends from theupper enclosure2214. When the pins2322 are positioned in theslot2324, theconnector2302 is pivoted about theaxis2324 such that another set of pins (not shown) engage aslot2328 formed between thetab2326 and anothertab2330, the pins being guided in theslot2328 to guide connectors (not shown) into engagement with theports2304,2308,2310,2312,2314,2316,2318,2320 of themanifold2168. Once engaged, the friction between the connectors and the respective ports retains theconnector2302 in place with movement restricted by engagement of the pins with theslot2328. Once theconnector23 is secured to the ports of the manifold2168, thecover2298 is positioned such that twobiased tabs2326 and2328 are positioned inrespective gaps2330 and2332 between thetabs2324 and thepanel772 as defined by the opening2294. Thetabs2326 and2328 frictionally retain the cover in place with an interference fit in thegaps2330 and2332.
Themicroclimate management system1906 includes a spacer material positioned between two cover layers. A suitable spacer material is a part number SFE 20N 200 from Pressless. A suitable upper material is a part number CFX-45 from Carr NA. A suitable lower material isRecovery 5 HF from Ventex, Inc.
In other embodiments, a patient support surface may have other embodiments of a microclimate management system. For example, an illustrativepatient support apparatus3110 embodied as ahospital bed10 is shown inFIG. 119. Thepatient support apparatus3110 includes aframe3118, apatient support structure3112 supported on theframe3118, and anair box3122. Thepatient support structure3112 is adapted to support a patient lying on thepatient support apparatus3110 and includes ahead section3132, aseat section3137, and afoot section3134. As will be discussed in further detail below, thepatient support structure3112 further includes amicroclimate structure3114 and acushion layer3116 which supports themicroclimate structure3114 as shown inFIG. 126. Thecushion layer3116 may include a plurality ofinflatable support bladders3148. Themicroclimate structure3114 is positioned on thecushion layer3116 on an occupant side and adjacent asupport surface3123 and is configured to conduct air adjacent thesupport surface3123 of thepatient support structure3112. The air conducted by themicroclimate structure3114 is pressurized and pushed through themicroclimate structure3114 by theair box3122. By conducting air along an interface of thesupport surface3123 and the patient, themicroclimate structure3114 transfers heat and moisture from the patient and cools and dries the patient's skin in order to reduce the risk ofhospital bed10 sore formation by the patient.
Referring again toFIG. 119, theair box3122 further includes auser interface3160 that is configured to receive user inputs. Theuser interface3160 includes adisplay screen3121 and a plurality ofbuttons3120 for inputting patient information and for controlling operation of theair box3122 and thesupport surface3123. Particularly, theuser interface3160 allows a user to adjust the flow of air provided by theair box3122 to themicroclimate structure3114 and, in some embodiments, to adjust the temperature of air provided by theair box3122 to themicroclimate structure3114. Specifically, in some embodiments, theuser interface3160 may include a patient information input panel, an alarm panel, a lateral rotation therapy panel, an inflation mode panel, a normal inflation control panel, and a microclimate control panel.
Themicroclimate structure3114 is configured to receive pressurized air from theair box3122 and to conduct air through themicroclimate structure3114 to cool and dry the interface between a patient and thepatient support apparatus3110 to promote skin health by removing patient heat and moisture along the interface when the patient is supported on thepatient support apparatus3110. Themicroclimate structure3114 generally spans laterally from aleft side36 to aright side3138 and extends longitudinally from an upper end of thehead section3132 to alower end3180 of theseat section3137, excluding thefoot section3134 of thepatient support structure3112 as shown inFIG. 125. However, in some embodiments, themicroclimate structure3114 may include thefoot section3134 and extend from the upper end of thehead section3132 to the bottom end of thefoot section3134 of thepatient support structure3112 as shown inFIG. 124.
Referring toFIG. 120, in one embodiment, themicroclimate structure3114 further includes atherapeutic region3140 which is specifically configured to target specific areas of the patient's body where local climate control is most needed. This corresponds to the areas where the pressure of patient's weight against thesupport surface3123 is the greatest when the patient is lying supine and centered on themicroclimate structure3114. Thetherapeutic region3140 may be made from a highly breathable material or a perforated material, as will described in more detail below.
As shown inFIGS. 120-122, embodiments ofmicroclimate structure3114,3214, and3314 may have respectivetherapeutic regions3140,3240, and3340 having different shapes. Because the patient's sweat glands are distributed non-uniformly throughout the patient's body, perspiration tends to accumulate on the skin of the patient's torso and pelvic region. Therefore, the shape of thetherapeutic region3340 is designed to provide a local climate control to those areas that are generally prone to moisture accumulation, whereastherapeutic regions3140 and3240 are more broadly distributed.
Thetherapeutic region3140 is in thehead section3132 andseat section3137 of thepatient support structure3112 as shown inFIG. 120. The largetherapeutic region3140 ensures to underlie the patient's torso and pelvic region. Alternatively, in some embodiments, thetherapeutic region3140 is smaller and more narrowly tailored to the patient's specific region. By reducing the area of thetherapeutic region3140 through which theair box3122 is required to push air, themicroclimate structure3114 allows for reduction of the pressure and flow needed from an air source included in theair box3122. For example, as shown inFIG. 121, apatient support apparatus3210 includes amicroclimate structure3214 having thetherapeutic region3240 that extends from the patient's waist line to the inferior end of the patient's pelvic region and spans laterally across themicroclimate structure3214 from its right side its left side. Thetherapeutic region3240 is designed to underlie the patient's pelvic region, particularly under the sacrum.
In another embodiment, thetherapeutic region3340 is further arranged to underlie both the patient's pelvic region and the torso region. As shown inFIGS. 122 and 123, apatient support apparatus3310 includes amicroclimate structure3314 with atherapeutic region3340 that generally extends from a superior end of the patient's torso region to an inferior end of the patient's pelvic region to deliver effective climate control to the patient's pelvic region, particularly under the sacrum, and the torso region, particularly under the scapulae, of a patient when the patient is lying supine and centered on themicroclimate structure3314. The shape and size of thetherapeutic region3340 is designed to cover approximately 95% of the patients' different body sizes so that the patients' torso and pelvic regions would lay on top of thetherapeutic region3340 in order to reduce the risk ofhospital bed10 sore formation.
In each embodiment ofmicroclimate structures3114,3214, and3314, a fluid flow path having aninlet port3142 spans laterally across therespective microclimate structures3114,3214, and3314 from its right side to its left side and extends longitudinally through themicroclimate structures3114,3214, and3314 to thehead section3132 of thepatient support structures3112,3212, and3312. Theinlet port3142 is directly coupled to theair box3122 via adistribution sleeve3194 and is located at thelower end3180 of theseat section3137 of thepatient support structures3112,3212, and3312. Thus, air from theair box3122 is introduced into themicroclimate structures3114,3214, and3314 at the origination point orinlet port3142 near the pelvic region of the patient lying on themicroclimate structures3114,3214, and3314. By directing the location of air introduction from theair box3122 closer to thetherapeutic regions3140,3240, or3340, therespective microclimate structures3114,3214, or3314 will provide an effective amount of cooling and drying to a patient's skin at the specific targeted areas, and achieve the effective result with minimal air. Having theinlet port3142 near thetherapeutic regions3140,3240, or3340 prevents air from diffusing out of themicroclimate structures3214,3314, and3414 while the air flows from theinlet port3142 to thetherapeutic regions3140,3240, or3340, thus requires less volume of air. However, in some embodiments, theinlet port3142 may be positioned at the foot end of themicroclimate structure3114. Further, themicroclimate structure3114 has anoutlet3144 at thehead section3132 of thepatient support structure3112 to exhaust the air and/or liquid as shown inFIGS. 124 and 125. Theoutlet3144 is optional and may be implemented in any of the embodiments disclosed herein. Other inlet port and outlet designs may be used in other embodiments. When theoutlet3144 is omitted, the air that traverses therespective microclimate structures3114,3214, and3314 is pushed out through theperforations3141 in thetherapeutic regions3140,3240, or334040 and escapes through anouter ticking layer3124 of thepatient support structures3112,3212, or3312.
Theouter ticking layer3124 encompasses themicroclimate structures3214,3314,3414 as shown inFIGS. 126-127. Theouter ticking layer3124 includes anupper ticking layer3150 and alower ticking layer3152. Theupper ticking layer3150 covers themicroclimate structure3114 and thelower ticking layer3152 encases thecushion layer3116 as shown inFIGS. 126-127. Theupper ticking layer3150 comprises a breathable material that is vapor permeable but liquid impermeable. This allows the patient heat and moisture to flow away from the patient's skin in form of vapor and pass through theupper ticking layer3150 into the area which encloses themicroclimate structure3114. The vapor then condenses between theupper ticking layer3150 and a first orupper layer3126 of themicroclimate structure3114. At least a portion of theupper layer3126 comprises of a vapor and liquid permeable material which defines thetherapeutic region3140. In the illustrative embodiment, thetherapeutic region3140 of theupper layer3126 includes a number ofperforations3141 that allows the condensed moisture and liquid from thetherapeutic region3140 to flow through theupper layer3126 into amiddle layer3128 of themicroclimate structure3114. Theupper layer3126 comprises a vapor permeable but liquid impermeable material to allow vapor to flow through theupper layer3126. In some embodiments, theperforations3141 are omitted. In such embodiments, thetherapeutic regions3140,3240,3340 have theupper layer3126 removed in the region and a highly breathable, vapor and liquid permeable material is positioned in theregion3140,3240, or3340 and bonded, welded, glued, or otherwise secured to theupper layer3126. In other embodiments, the entireupper layer3126 comprises a vapor and liquid permeable non-coated fabric, and the area of theupper layer3126 except thetherapeutic regions3140,3240,3340 is coated with a liquid impermeable material which holds air within the coated layers. In the illustrated embodiments, themicroclimate structure3114 and thecushion layer3116 are separated by amiddle ticking layer3154, which is a top layer of thelower ticking layer3152. However, in some embodiments, a unitaryouter ticking layer3124 may encase the entirepatient support structure3112, including themicroclimate structure3114 and thecushion layer3116.
The material of themiddle layer3128 is a three-dimensional material. The three-dimensional material is arranged to extend from the upper end of thehead section3132 to the lower end of thefoot section3134 of thepatient support structure3112 as shown inFIGS. 124 and 126. The three-dimensional material is air and liquid permeable. Theinlet port3142 is coupled to thelower end3180 of theseat section3137 of the three-dimensional material to allow air from theair box3122 to flow between theupper layer3126 and alower layer3130 of themicroclimate structure3114 and from thelower end3180 of theseat section3137 to thehead section3132 of thepatient support structure3112. Therefore, once the moisture and liquid reach themiddle layer3128 from theupper layer3126, the moisture and liquid are carried away and evaporated by air flowing through themiddle layer3128. The cooled-vapor can then be either directed toward theoutlet3144 or back toward thesupport surface3123 to cool and dry the patient's skin around the interface of the patient's skin with thesupport surface3123.
In some embodiments, as shown inFIGS. 125 and 127, apatient support structure3412 includes amicroclimate structure3414 arranged with themiddle layer3128 having more than one section of the three-dimensional material. Themiddle layer3128 includes adivider3162 that pneumatically separate afirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material from asecond section3166 of the three-dimensional material. Thefirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material is arranged to extend from the upper end of thehead section3132 to thelower end3180 of theseat section3137 of thepatient support structure3412. Theinlet port3142 is coupled to thelower end3180 of theseat section3137 of thefirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material. Therefore, thetherapeutic region3140 is positioned on top of thefirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material because only thefirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material receives air from theair box3122. Thefirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material is spaced apart from thefoot section3134 of themicroclimate structure3214 to reduce the area through which theair box3122 is required to push air.
Thesecond section3166 of the three-dimensional material is arranged to extend from thelower end3180 of theseat section3137 to the bottom end of thefoot section3134 of thepatient support structure3412. Thesecond section3166 of the three-dimensional material lacks theinlet port3142. Therefore, thesecond section3166 of the three-dimensional material does not receive air from theair box3122, instead thesecond section3166 of the three-dimensional material passively flow air along the foot end of themicroclimate structure3414. In other embodiments, thefirst section3164 of the three-dimensional material may be positioned at different locations relative to the patient and/or may be broken into different sections to create multiple therapeutic regions of a microclimate structure. Although in some embodiments, materials other than the three-dimensional material, such as foam padding, can be used for the second section of themiddle layer3128.
Lastly, thelower layer3130 of themicroclimate structure3114,3214 comprises a liquid impermeable material to prevent liquid from leaking through thelower layer3130 into thecushion layer3116. Illustratively, thecushion layer3116 includes theinflatable support bladders3148 to support themicroclimate structure3114 or3414 as shown inFIGS. 8 and 9, respectively. Themicroclimate structures3314 or3414 may also be similarly supported. Accordingly, theair box3122 is coupled to themicroclimate structures3114,3214, or3314 and theinflatable support bladders3148 to provide pressurized air to thesupport surface3123 and thecushion layer3116. In other embodiments, thecushion layer3116 may omit some or all of theinflatable support bladders3148 and utilize foam cushioning structures instead of theinflatable support bladders3148.
Referring toFIG. 128, theillustrative microclimate structure3114 is configured to receive air from theair box3122 mounted on theframe3118, but in other embodiments, anair box3222 may be integrated into theframe3118 of thepatient support apparatus3110 as shown inFIG. 129. When theair box3222 is integrated into theframe3118, the functions of theuser interface3160 may be placed on thefootboard3202 of thepatient support apparatus3110 or on a siderail. The air from theair box3122 is introduced into themicroclimate structure3114 at theinlet port3142 near thetherapeutic region3140 and flows through themiddle layer3128 of themicroclimate structure3114 toward the head end of themicroclimate structure3114 as suggested byarrows3156 inFIG. 128. The air flows to exhaust through theoutlet3144 positioned at thehead end3132 of themicroclimate structure3114.
Turning toFIG. 130, thepatient support apparatus3110 is shown diagrammatically to include theframe3118, thepatient support structure3112, and theair box3122. Theair box3122 illustratively includes theuser interface3160, acontroller3168, ablower3176, and aheater3174. Thecontroller3168 is coupled for communication with theuser interface3160, theblower3176, and theheater3174. Thecontroller3168 is also coupled for communication with avalve box3178. The blower3175 provides pressurized air for theinflatable support bladders3148 and for themicroclimate structure3114. Theheater3174 is arranged in line with theblower3176 and is configured to warm air from theblower3176 before the air is delivered to themicroclimate structure3114. In some embodiments, a cooler (not shown) or other air conditioning device(s) may also be included between theblower3176 and themicroclimate structure3114 to prepare the air for use in therapeutic flow adjacent to a patient's skin. In some embodiments, thepatient support structure3112 may include temperature sensors which are coupled to thecontroller3168 to permit thecontroller3168 to operate theheater3174 to achieve a specific temperature at thepatient support surface3123. Sensors may also be placed elsewhere in the air flow to provide feedback to thecontroller3168. In other embodiments, theair box3122 may take ambient air, pressurize it, and deliver it to themicroclimate structure3114.
Theframe3118 illustratively includes abase3182 and adeck3181. Thebase3182 is configured to support thedeck3181, thepatient support structure3112, and theair box3122 above a floor3190. Thedeck3181 underlies themicroclimate structure3114 and is reconfigurable to adjust the position of thepatient support structure3112 when a patient is on thepatient support apparatus3110 so that the patient can be supported while lying flat, sitting up inhospital bed10, or in a number of other positions.
Thepatient support structure3112 includes (from bottom to top) thelower ticking layer3152, afoam shell3188,optional turn bladders3186, thevalve box3178, anair manifold3184,inflatable support bladders3148a,3148b,3148c, the optionalmiddle ticking layer3154, themicroclimate structure3114, and theupper ticking layer3150 as shown inFIG. 130. Theupper ticking layer3124 covers themicroclimate structure3114 and thelower ticking layer3152 encases thecushion layer3116. Themiddle ticking layer3154 is a top layer of thelower ticking layer3152 and is positioned between themicroclimate structure3114 and thecushion layer3116. The foam shell3158 cooperates with theinflatable support bladders3148 to provide a cushion on which the patient is supported while positioned on thepatient support apparatus3110. Theturn bladders3186 are optional and are coupled to theair box3122 through thevalve box3178. Theturn bladders3186 may be inflated to rotate a patient about a longitudinal axis3192 of thesupport surface3123. In addition to the turn bladders3159, thevalve box3178 is pneumatically coupled to themicroclimate structure3114 via theair manifold3184 and to theinflatable support bladders3148 to distribute air from theair box3122 around thesupport surface3123. Theair manifold3184 receives air from theair box3122 via thevalve box3178 and delivers the air to themicroclimate structure3114 at theinlet port3142.
Theinflatable support bladders3148 illustratively includehead section bladders3148a,seat section bladders3148b, andfoot section bladders3148c. Each section ofbladders3148a,3148b, and3148cis inflatable to different pressures depending on pressure level selected on theuser interface3160 for patient comfort. Each section ofbladders3148a,3148b, and3148cmay also be inflated or deflated to provide patient therapies or to reduce the risk ofhospital bed10 sores. In other embodiments, thebladders3148a,3148b,3148cmay be omitted and foam padding may replace one or more of theinflatable bladders3148a,3148b, and3148c.
Themicroclimate structure3114 illustratively includes aupper layer3126 configured to underlie a patient on thepatient support apparatus3110, alower layer3130 spaced apart from theupper layer3126, amiddle layer3128 arranged between theupper layer3126 and thelower layer3130, and thedistribution sleeve3194 as shown diagrammatically inFIG. 130. Theupper layer3126 is made from a vapor- and liquid-permeable fabric, whereas thelower layer3130 is made from a liquid-impermeable fabric. The middle layer is configured to provide an air gap between theupper layer3126 and thelower layer3130. Thelower layer3130 is formed to include aninlet port3142 arranged near thetherapeutic region3140.
Another embodiment of apatient support apparatus2810 is shown inFIG. 102. For structures that are common to the prior embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used. In the illustrative embodiment, those controls accessible to a patient are found on apendant2838 which is shown to be positioned on theright siderail2830 in the embodiment shown inFIG. 1. Thependant2838 is also optionally supportable from auser interface2840 which is supported from asupport arm2842 identified aspendant2838′ is shown in phantom to be supported from the lower edge of theuser interface2840 inFIG. 102. Anotherpendant2838″ is shown in phantom to be supported from the upper edge of theright head siderail50 inFIG. 102. The structures for supporting thependant2838 provide ergonomic access to the controls on thependant2838 to a patient supported in a supine position on thepatient support surface2822 will be discussed in further detail below.
Thependant2838 includes aninterface surface2844 as shown inFIG. 103. Thependant2838 is electrically connected to the control structure of thepatient support apparatus2810 through acable2846. In other embodiments, thependant2838 may communicate with the control system of thepatient support apparatus2810 through a wireless connection, such as an infrared connection or a radiofrequency connection. Thependant2838 is supported on theright siderail2830 by amount2848 formed in theupper surface2851 of theright siderail2830. It should be noted that thependant2838 includes various functionality as is known in the art, including functionality that allows a patient to change the adjustment of the deck sections of thepatient support apparatus2810, adjust environmental conditions such as lighting, adjust entertainment options such as a television channel or volume, or allows the patient to place a nurse call. As shown inFIG. 104 thependant2838 may be removed from themount2848 by apatient2850. When so removed, thependant2838 may be held in the patient's hand so that the functionality available on the pendant may be accessed by thepatient2850 using a single hand or holding thependant2838 in one hand and activating functions with another hand.
When the pendant is secured to themount2848, theinterface surface2844 of thependant2838 is oriented at an ergonomic angle presenting theinterface surface2844 in a position that faces the patient's head when thepatient2850 is supported on thepatient support apparatus2810 in a supine position. This can be contrasted with other applications in the prior art where theinterface surface2844 of the user interface, such as thependant2838, is presented at an angle which limits that access to thepatient2850 because theinterface surface2844 is not oriented perpendicular to the patient's line of sight. Themount2848 includes twoprotrusions2852 and2854 positioned on theupper surface2851 of theright siderail2830. It should be noted that themount2848 is formed to provide a relatively continuous surface profile that cooperates with theupper surface2851 of theright siderail2830 when thependant2838 is not positioned on themount2848.
Referring now toFIG. 105, theinterface surface2844 of thependant2838, when positioned on theupper surface2851 of theright siderail2830 is oriented such that theinterface surface2844 is generally perpendicular to the line ofsight2858 of a patient supported on the patient support apparatus in a supine position. Theinterface surface2844 can be defined by the plane formed when afirst axis2860 and asecond axis2862, perpendicular to thefirst axis2860 intersect. Theaxis2862 corresponds to the longitudinal length of thependant2838. Theaxis2862 forms an angle α relative to horizontal as illustrated byaxis2864 as shown inFIG. 107. In the illustrative embodiment, α is about 45 degrees. In other embodiments, α may vary between 30-60 degrees. It should be noted that the patient's line ofsight2858 changes as the head deck section2820 moves relative tohorizontal axis2864. The angle α presents theinterface surface2844 to the patient line ofsight2858 when the head deck section2820 is in a fully raised position.
In the embodiment ofFIG. 108, theinterface surface2844 of thependant2838 is also oriented toward the patient through the orientation of theaxis2860 which is positioned at an angle β relative to aninterior surface2866 of theright siderail2830. In the illustrative embodiment, β is about 70 degrees. In other embodiments, β may vary between 45 and 90 degrees.Right siderail2830 includes anexterior surface2867. This orientation of theinterface surface2844 ofpendant2838 causes the line ofsight2858 of the patient to be generally perpendicular to theaxis2860 which lies in the plane that coincides with theinterface surface2844.
Referring now toFIG. 111, themount2848 formed on theright siderail2830 and defined by theprotrusions2852 and2854, each engage thependant2838 and are received into a space2868 formed in the back of thependant2838 when thependant2838 is engaged with themount2848. Alower end2870 of thependant2838 has achannel2872 formed therein, the channel being defined by afirst flange2874 and asecond flange2876. Thechannel2872 includes asurface2878 which is tapered such that as thependant2838 is placed on themount2848 and slid in the direction ofarrow2880, theprotrusions2852 and2854 are received in the space2868 and engage thesurface2878. In this way, thependant2838 includes a grip that is at least defined bysurface2878 andflanges2874 and2876, the grip used to secure thependant2838 to themount2848. Because thesurface2878 is tapered, the movement of the pendant along the direction ofarrow2880 causes the engagement of theprotrusions2852 and2854 with both thesurface2878 and theflanges2874 and2876 to frictionally secure thependant2838 to themount2848. When the pendant is engaged with themount2848, the upper ends2884 and2886 of eachprotrusion2852 and2854, respectively, are positioned in thechannel2872 so that theflanges2874 and2876 underlie theprotrusions2854 and2852 respectively. This causes thependant2838 to be positioned as shown inFIG. 2 on theright siderail2830 with the lower ends2855 and2857, of theprotrusions2852 and2854 respectively, extending below the lower end of thependant2838.
Additional details of the pendant are shown inFIGS. 111-113 illustrating that thesurface2878 is tapered which is what causes the pendant to be frictionally engaged with themount2848. It should be understood that themount2848 may be positioned on various surfaces of thepatient support apparatus2810 to allow thependant2838 to be frictionally secured in various locations on thepatient support apparatus2810. For example, theuser interface2840 is shown inFIG. 114 with a personaldigital assistant2890 secured to theuser interface2840 by a number offlexible mounts2892,2894,2896, and2898. The personaldigital assistant2890 may be a personal smart phone or notebook type device with atouchscreen2900. Theuser interface2840 allows the personaldigital assistant2890 to be positioned for easy access by a patient supported on thepatient support apparatus2810. Theuser interface2840 includeshandles2902 and2904 which allow a patient to reposition theuser interface2840 for easy access. Theuser interface2840 includes amount2848 positioned on a lower edge2906 of theuser interface2840. Thependant2838 may optionally be engaged with themount2848 positioned on theuser interface2840 as shown inFIG. 114. This allows thependant2838 to be positioned within easy reach of a patient supported on thepatient support apparatus2810. In other embodiments, such as that suggested by thependant2838″ shown inFIG. 102, an upper edge of a head siderail, such asright head siderail2834 may be formed to include amount2848 to permit thependant2838 to be positioned on theright head siderail2834.
In another embodiment shown inFIGS. 115-118, apendant2938 includes a main body orhousing2940 and a spring-biasedgrip2942 positioned on abackside2944 of thependant2938. Thependant2938 includes acord2946 which is attached to an electrical connection to allow thependant2938 communicate with a control system of a patient support apparatus, such aspatient support apparatus2810. An upper end2948 of thependant2938 defines achannel2950. Opposingarms2952 and2954 are positioned inrespective housings2956 and2958 of thependant2938. Thearms2952 and2954 are spring-biased and urged toward each other. Eacharm2952,2954 has arespective channel2960 and2962 which is configured to engage a mount positioned on various structures of a patient support apparatus as will be discussed in further detail below. The spring action of thearms2952,2954 causes thearms2952,2954 to come together so that thechannels2960 and2962 engage a rigid structure on the patient support apparatus, thearms2952,2954 acting to grip or clamp thependant2938 to the mount of the patient support apparatus. Eacharm2952 and2954 has a respective leading-edge2964 and2966 which acts as a cam when the leading edges engage a corresponding mount so that, as pressure is applied, thearms2952 and2954 are urged apart to step over the mount and allow thearms2952 and2954 to clamp onto the mount as will be discussed in further detail below.
Thependant2938 is shown inFIG. 116 with therespective housings2956 and2958 removed. Thearm2952 is secured to thebody2940 by ahinge2968 about which thearm2952 pivots. Thearm2954 pivots about ahinge2970. Thearms2952 and2954 are biased to a closed position by a pair ofsprings2972 and2974. Eacharm2952 and2954 has an upper surface2976 and2978, respectively which engage therespective housings2956 and2958 to prevent thearms2952,2954 from closing completely and allowing thesprings2972 and2974 to disengage from thebody2940. Thus, there is a freedom of movement of thearms2952 and2954 into thehousings2956 and2958 to allow the clamp formed by thearms2952 and2954 to be opened when engaged with a mount. However, thearms2952 and2954 are restrained from closing any further than that shown inFIG. 115 which is sufficient to allow thearms2952 and2954 to grip or clamp to a complementary mount.
One example of a complementary mount2982 is shown inFIG. 117 on another embodiment of asiderail60. The mount2982 includes asurface2988 formed on a portion of thesiderail60, thesurface2988 being defined by a pair ofperpendicular intersecting axes2984 and2986. Theaxis2984 is oriented to aninner surface2990 of thesiderail2980 at an angle β as discussed above with regard to the embodiment ofright siderail2830. Similarly, theaxis2986 is oriented relative to horizontal at an angle off as discussed above with regard to theright siderail2830. This allows thependant2938 to be oriented with a front surface2992 oriented generally perpendicular to the patient's line ofsight2858 as described above. While only a portion of the mount2982 is shown, it is symmetrical on opposite sides of theaxis2986. The mount includes acavity2994 formed in the siderail formed on opposite sides of theaxis2986 such that the surface188 is narrow along aportion2996 and expands to a wider width at aportion2998. An undercut3000 inside of thecavity2994 expands to an increased thickness at aterminal end3002 of thecavity2994. In use, a user positions thependant2938 with the grips over theportion2996 and slides thependant2938 in the direction ofarrow3004 such that thearms2952,2954 engage theportion2998 and the undercut3000 with the undercut3000 causing expansion of thearms2952,2954 as it is engaged with thechannels2960 and2962 of thearms2952 and2954 respectively. This causes the bias of thesprings2972 and2974 associated with eacharm2952,2954 to urge thegrip2942 into contact with theportion2998 to secure thependant2938 to thesiderail2980 through the clamping force of thearms2952 and2954. The user may easily remove thependant2938 by sliding the pendant in the direction opposite the direction ofarrow3004 which causes thependant2938 to be released from thesiderail2980.
Another embodiment of amount3010 is positioned on an inner surface3012 of ahead siderail50 as shown inFIG. 118. Thehead siderail50 is formed to include acavity3016 with themount3010 being positioned in thecavity3016. The mount has a base3018 secured to a wall3020 in thecavity3016. Themount3010 further includes anupper surface3022 and thefront wall3024. In addition, opposingside walls3026 and3028 are positioned on opposite sides of themount3010 and are configured to be engaged with thearms2952 and2954 of thependant2938. A leadingsurface3030 provides a transition between theupper surface3022 in thewall3026. Similarly a leadingsurface3032 provides a transition between theupper surface3022 and the side wall3028. A third leading surface3034 provides a transition between theupper surface3022 and thefront wall3024. Each of the leading services are configured to engage with thearms2952 and2954 to urge thearms2952 and2954 apart as the pendant is positioned on the mount by sliding the pendant down in the direction of arrow3036.
When thependant2938 is mounted to thesiderail3014 and engages with themount3010, thearm2828 engages theside wall3026 and thearm2954 engages the sidewall3028. In this position, thearms2952 and2954 act to clamp thependant2938 to themount3010 of thesiderail3014. It should be noted that thehousings2956 and2958 engage withsurfaces3040 and3042 of thecavity3016 respectively so that the combination of the spring action of thegrip2942 holds thependant2938 firmly in place while permitting thependant2938 to be easily removed. It should be understood that a mount similar to the mount2982 or themount3010 may be positioned in various positions on a patient support apparatus, such as thispatient support apparatus290. For example, themount2848 disclosed on theuser interface2840 may be omitted and replaced with a mount2982 or amount3010 to allow thependant2938 to be mounted to theuser interface2840. It should also be noted that themount2848 may be positioned as shown inFIG. 1 with reference to mount2848′.
Referring toFIG. 10,bag support860 includes anupper rail3540 that is not parallel to therail758 of thesecond portion38. Afirst end3542 is spaced apart from therail758 than asecond end3544. The ends3542 and3544 form loops withrespective legs864 and3548 of thebag support860. A second,smaller rail3546 is positioned below theupper rail990 and is generally parallel to therail758.Rail3546 forms aloop3550 with theleg864 and aleg3548 forms aloop3552 with theleg866. The structure provides multiple hanging points for a drainage bag to be hung from thebag support860. Theloops3542 and3550 are positioned at thefoot end12 of thefoot deck34 while theloops3544 and3552 are positioned closer to thehead end14. When thefoot deck34 is in a flat and horizontal position, theloop3550 is generally horizontally aligned with theloop3544. Thus, under normal conditions, the drainage bag or main level if hung fromloops3550 and3544. As the orientation of thefoot deck34 takes a steeper inclination, the drainage bag may be progressively moved until it is hung fromloop3542 andloop3552 which will maintain the drainage bag in a generally vertical orientation when thefoot deck34 is in its most steep inclination.
Another embodiment of adrainage bag support3554 is shown inFIGS. 58-60. Thedrainage bag3556 is hung from theback support3554. As shown inFIG. 60, thebag support3554 has an upper rail3558 alower rail3560 and aloop3562. Referring back toFIG. 59, when the bag support is hung with one hook on thelower rail3560 and another hook on theupper rail3558, it will be normally maintained in an appropriate orientation. Depending on the width of thehook structure3564, one of the hooks may be positioned in theloop3562. As illustrated by the progression of the inclination of thefoot deck34 inFIG. 59, thebag3556 is not held in an appropriate orientation. However, moving both hooks of thehook structure3564 to theupper rail3558, the drainage bag can be maintained in an appropriate position.
Theauxiliary wheel assembly212 shown inFIG. 32 may be used as an alternative embodiment to the use of steer casters as described with reference toFIG. 11. Theauxiliary wheel assembly212 includes aframe3564 which is mountable to thelongitudinal rails140 and142 of thebase frame20. Theauxiliary wheel assembly212 includes awheel3566 which is maintained in constant contact with the floor, but is permitted to swivel about anaxis3568 when thehospital bed10 is not in a steer mode. In general, the pedal structure described inFIG. 11 is used with the embodiment ofFIG. 32, but breakshaft assembly155 is omitted and replaced with abreak shaft assembly3570 which includes aclevis3572 which is coupled to ashaft3574 so that theclevis3572 rotates with theshaft3574. Theclevis3572 engages aloop3576 of acable assembly3578. Movement of theclevis3572 due to rotation of theshaft3574 when a steer pedal is activated, causes wire that forms theloop3576 to move thereby cause agrip3580 shown inFIG. 54 to close such that theauxiliary wheel3566 is oriented along the longitudinal axis of thehospital bed10. Theauxiliary wheel assembly212 will lock the orientation of thewheel3566 in either the trailing orientation shown inFIG. 54 or in a leading orientation wherein afork3582 is oriented in the opposite direction from that shown inFIG. 54.
Thegrip3580 is shown in a closed position inFIG. 54, which results in the orientation of thewheel3566 to be maintained. The grip includes astationary body3584 and aclamp3586 which will rotate about anaxis3588. Thecable assembly3578 is fixed to thestationary body3584 at a connection3590 asheath3592 of thecable assembly3578 remain stationary while the wire moves within thesheath3578. The wire is fixed to a shaft which is within twosprings3594 and3596. The shaft is free to move within thesprings3594,3596 but has anend3598 positioned on the distal end of thespring3596. Movement of the wire that causes the and3598 to move in the direction of anarrow3600 releases the compression of theSprings3594 and3596 and allows theclamp3586 to rotate about theaxis3588 in the direction of anarrow3602. In that condition, thewheel support assembly3604 is free to rotate about thevertical axis3568. Anupper arm3606 is secured to a plate (not shown) that includes two opposing flat edges which can be captured between thestationary body3584 and theclamp3586 when the shaft is positioned as shown inFIG. 54. While the plate has two parallel straight edges, the remainder of the plate is rounded so that it axes a cam surface between theclamp3586 and thebody3580. It has been found that even when thewheel3566 is not oriented in a position to track along the longitudinal axis of thehospital bed10, movement of thehospital bed10 along its longitudinal axis tends to cause the wheel two track along the longitudinal axis applying force to theassembly3604 which urges theassembly3604 to rotate about theaxis3568 until theclamp3586 andstationary body3584 engages the parallel edges of the plate, locking thewheel3566 and an appropriate orientation to assist with steering thehospital bed10
Thewheel3566 is maintained in contact with the floor through the urging of atorsional spring3608 which urges thefork3582 away from theupper arm3606 urging thewheel3566 against the floor. However, thetorsional spring3608 provides a shock absorbing effect if thewheel3566 encounters an obstruction while moving along the floor, permitting thewheel support assembly3604 two collapse closing the gap between theupper arm3606 and thefork3582 as thehospital bed10 traverses the obstruction. Theauxiliary wheel assembly212 provides an advantage of eliminating a linkage to deploy a steer wheel as his previously known in the art, thereby simplifying the operation and reducing cost. Theframe3564 is secured to thebase frame20 by fourbolts3610 and fournuts3612 that clamp theframe3564 to therails140,142 of thebase frame20. Theauxiliary wheel assembly212 includes ashroud3614 that is secured to the fame by twoscrews3616,3616.
In some embodiments, thehospital bed10 may include a pair of extended push handles3620 and3622 as shown inFIG. 47A. The extended push handles3620,3622 mount similarly to the push handles394,396 used for the powereddrive wheel assembly92. Referring toFIG. 33A the extendedpush handle3620 includes abase shroud3624 which overlies astem3626 which engages themount tubes402 on thebase frame20. An uppercurved arm3628 is received internally in thestem3626 and apin3630 passes through aslot3632 of the uppercurved arm3628 to secure the upper curved arm to thestem3626. Thepen3630 is secured with anut3634. As seen inFIG. 33B thebase3624 includes arelief3636 which accommodates ashaft3638 of theupper arm3628 when thepush handle3620 is folded over to a storage position. In use, thepush handle3620 is inserted such that thetip3640 is seated in theinner diameter3642 of thestem3626. To stow the push handle3620 the user pulls the push handle upwardly in the direction ofarrow3644 such that it clears therelief3636 of the base and arelief3646 of thestem3626. The push handle is then capable of being laid down to a stowed position. Agrip3648 is positioned on anupper tube3650. The push handle3622 is structured similarly to the push handle3620 with the principal difference being the direction of the bends in anupper arm3652 of the push handle3622 to accommodate clearance when thehandles3620,3622 are stowed. Thegrips3648 are elongated to allow for a larger variation in height of a user providing an improved ergonomic structure for persons who utilize the transport handles on thehospital bed10.
In some embodiments, thehospital bed10 includes theauxiliary outlet110 positioned at thefoot end12 of thehospital bed10 as shown inFIG. 1. The assembly of theauxiliary outlet110 is shown inFIG. 36. While the cabling that provides power to the auxiliary outlet is omitted, should be understood that theauxiliary outlet110 is powered independently of the electrical system of thehospital bed10. Theauxiliary outlet110 includes aback body3660 which is secured to achannel3662 by screws3664 ashelf3664 is secured to thechannel3662 provides additional support for theback body3660 in the event someone steps on theauxiliary outlet110. Acircuit breaker3666 is positioned in theback body3660 connected electrically as shown inFIG. 51. Aduplex outlet3668 is also positioned in theback body3660. Agasket3670 is positioned over theoutlet3668 andcircuit breaker3666, thegasket3670 being covered by astandard cover3672 which is then covered by aprotective cover3674 which protects against fluid ingress into theduplex outlet3668. Thechannel3662 is secured to thechannel144 of thebase frame20 by a pair ofbolts3676 and ashroud3678 is positioned over the entire structure. The arrangement of theprotective cover3674 and the use of theshelf3664 provides for a durable auxiliary outlet for thehospital bed10. In addition, the addition of thecircuit breaker3666 which is accessible through theprotective cover3674 provides for improved safety and ease of use for users when equipment accidentally overloads theauxiliary outlet110.
Apendant3700 shown inFIG. 46A includes a springbiased grip assembly3702 shown inFIG. 46B. The springbiased grip3702 functions similarly to the springbiased grip2942, however thependant3700 utilizes a springbiased grip assembly3704 which is removably detachable from ahousing3706 without disassembling thependant3700. The springbiased grip assembly3704 is secured to abackside3708 of thehousing3706 by afastener3710 which is screwed into astructure3712, shown inFIG. 46C which prevents thefastener3710 from entering into acavity3714 formed between thehousing3706 and acover3716 of thependant3700. This arrangement allows the spring biased clamp to be replaced if it is damaged without breaking the seal on thependant3700. This arrangement allows damagedpendants3700 to have thegrip assembly3704 replaced without having to replace the entire pendant including the high-value circuit board2724. Thecover3716 is formed to include a string therelief3718 which engages acollar3720 on acable3722 of thependant3700. The cover is secured to thebody3706 by threefasteners3724 which are screwed intobosses3726 formed in thehousing3706. Once assembled amembrane panel3728 has a firstflex circuit connector3730 which is fed through anaperture3732 two attached to aconnector3734 on thecircuit board2724. A secondflex circuit connector3736 is positioned through anaperture3738 and connected to aconnector3740. Themembrane panel3728 is adhered to asurface3742 of thecover3716 to seal theapertures3732 and3738. An example of the functionality available in themmembrane panel3728 is shown inFIG. 66.
Referring toFIG. 61, in one embodiment thehard panel64 includes amembrane switch assembly2400 that provides access to a number of standard functions of thehospital bed10 for a caregiver. Thegraphical user interface66 is shown to have a number of iconic symbols which provide information to the caregiver and operate as soft keys for the caregiver to activate functions of thehospital bed10. A high-level menu structure2402 for thegraphical user interface66 is shown inFIG. 67. Under normal operating conditions, thegraphical user interface66 will display ahome screen2404 that is subject to a five-minute timeout which results in thehome screen2404 being replaced by asleep screen2406. The menu driven controls include a set of surface controls2408 which allow a user to interact with the controls for themattress1900. And alertsstructure2410 allows the user to interface with patientposition monitoring functionality2412 orchair exiting functionality2414. Ascale structure2416 allows a caregiver to access the operation of the scale system to utilize azeroing function2418 including the ability to zero thehospital bed10 for a new patient under astructure2420 or zero thehospital bed10 for the same patient undermenu structure2422. In addition, thescale structure2416 allows a user to access a weighingmenu structure2424. A Bluetooth® menu structure2426 allows a user to managing the pairing of devices with the Bluetooth® functionality of thehospital bed10. A chartingmenu structure2428 provides a menu structure for a caregiver to chart information available from thecontrol system402 external networks connected to thehospital bed10. Themenu structure2402 includes amenu structure2430 which allows a caregiver to adjust various preferences relative to thegraphical user interface66 andhospital bed10.Menu structure2432 is available for a caregiver to understand the operation of thegraphical user interface66 andhospital bed10. And amenu structure2434 allows a user to adjust operations of a sequential compression device when such a device is attached to thehospital bed10.
Thehome screen2404 is shown in detail inFIG. 68 and includes aninformation section2436, astatus section2438, amenu section2440, and aninteraction section2442. Theinformation section2436 includes ahelp screen icon2444 which activates the help screen when touched by user. In addition amaintenance indicator2446 provides an indication that thehospital bed10 requires maintenance. Abattery status indicator2448 displays a graphical representation of the charging status of a battery for thehospital bed10. Anetwork indicator2450 is illuminated when thehospital bed10 is connected to an external network, such as a nurse call network; including the NaviCare® nurse call system available from Hill-Rom, for example. When thehospital bed10 is connected to a network that includes location information, the room number or other location identifying information is displayed on theinformation section2436 as indicated byreference numeral2452. Anicon2454, when present, provides an indication that thehospital bed10 is connected to a Wi-Fi system. Similarly, anicon2456, when present, provides an indication of thehospital bed10 is connected to another device via a Bluetooth® connection.
Astatus section2438 includes anindicator2458 which provides a display of the current head angle of thehospital bed10. Alocation2460 of thestatus section2438 provides an indication that that thehospital bed10 is monitoring for an alert condition, such as an alert condition assisted with a patient position monitoring system. For example, theicon2462 shown inFIG. 68 provides an indication that the patient position monitoring system is set to alert if the patient exits thehospital bed10. Athird portion2464 of thestatus section2438 provides the indication of the status of a subsystem, such as an operating condition of themattress1900. Anicon2466 provides an iconic representation of the status of themattress1900 being in a maximum inflate mode. Theicon2466 may have components that flash, blank, illuminated in sequence, or otherwise provide an animated indication that a status is active. In addition, atext box2468 is displayed to indicate the condition in a text form. In the case of the maximum inflate mode, asecond text box2470 displays a timer indicating the amount of time that the system will permit themattress1900 to be maintained in the current state. In some embodiments, thetext box2468 is omitted and only an icon, such as theicon2466 is displayed. Thetext box2470 may not be present if there is no limit on the time for themattress1900 to be in the current condition. While thestatus section2438 in the illustrative embodiment ofFIG. 68 displays information regarding alerts at thelocation2460 and a status of themattress1900 at thelocation2464, in other embodiments the status of other subsystems may be displayed within the status section of thehome screen2404.
Themenu section2440 of thehome screen2404 includes ahome screen icon2472 which is generally always present on the display of thegraphical user interface66. When thehome screen icon2472 is activated by a caregiver, thehome screen2404 is displayed. A section2474 of themenu section2440 includes a number of icons which may be scrolled through by activating anarrow icon2476 positioned at the bottom of the section2474. The icons of the section2474 are shown inFIG. 71 in the order that they appear in the section2474. Analerts icon2590, when activated, causes thealerts menu structure2410 to become active in theinteraction section2442. Asurface icon2592, when activated, causes themenu structure2408 to become active in theinteraction section2442. Activation of acharting icon2596 causes the chartingmenu structure2428 to become active in theinteraction section2442. Activation of thescale icon2598 causes thescale menu structure2416 to become active in theinteraction section2442. TheSCD icon2600 is associated with theSCD menu structure2434. TheBluetooth® icon2602 causes the Bluetooth® menu structure2426 to be displayed in theinteraction section2442. Activation ofpreferences icon2604 causes thepreferences menu structure2430 to become active in theinteraction section2442.
Theinteraction section2442 displays up to six functions which may be activated by a caregiver from thehome screen2404. Anicon2480 is associated with a head angle limit alert and when activated will cause a warning to be displayed if the angle of thehead deck28 relative to the relative to theload frame26 is lowered below 30°. This function may be activated if the patient has a risk factor that requires the patient's upper body to be maintained in an upright position. When the head limit is activated anindicator2481 adjacent theicon2480 is illuminated. In some cases, modification of the head limit may be restricted. The operation of thehospital bed10 may be adjusted so that activation and deactivation of the head limit byicon2480 is locked out so that an inadvertent activation of theicon2480 does not toggle the alert monitoring to an off position. When a function, such as the head limit the function, is locked out, alockout indicator2478 is displayed adjacent the icon for the particular function.
Anicon2482 may be activated by a caregiver to cause automatic movement of thehead deck28, articulatedseat deck30, andfoot deck34 to a chair position, such as the position shown inFIG. 10. Activation of theicon2482 may also cause the lift system to operate such that thefoot end12 of the load frame is lowered relative to thehead end14. Activation of the icon2484 will cause thehead deck28 to be raised with the remainder of thehospital bed10 placed in a flat condition to ease the exiting of thehospital bed10 by a patient. In some embodiments, activation of the icon2484 may also affect the operation of themattress1900 when it is present. For example, activation of the icon2484 may cause thebody support1902 to be inflated to a pressure higher than normal to cause thebody support1902 to be stiffer and improve the support of the patient's buttocks as they are exiting thehospital bed10. Activation of the icon2486 will cause thehead deck28, articulatedseat deck30, andfoot deck34 to be placed in a flat condition while also causing thelift system22 to be moved to cause theload frame26 to be in a horizontal position. Theinteraction section2442 also displays a footretraction control section2494 which includes an icon2488 which may be activated to cause thefoot deck34 to be extended and anicon2490 which may be activated to cause thefoot deck34 to be retracted. Some of the icons displayed in theinteraction section2442 of thehome screen2404 may not be present if the associated functionality is omitted from thehospital bed10. For example, some embodiments ofhospital bed10 do not include apowered foot deck34, and therefore the footretraction control section2494 would not be present in those embodiments.
When thehospital bed10 is disconnected from a mains power source, thehospital bed10 may be operated by thebatteries2746,2748. When thehospital bed10 is on battery power, theinteraction section2442 displays the text “On Battery Backup” in the center of theinteraction section2442. Thehead limit icon2480 and associatedindicator2481 are also displayed as that function remains active. In addition, the foot control retraction section2294 remains displayed because that function is also available under battery backup. Thehome screen icon2472 remains visible such that a caregiver is allowed to activate thehome screen2404. However, thehome screen2404 will revert to the battery backup screen2492 after a period of time of no interactions with thehome screen2404, such as a time period of 30 seconds, for example. The other functions that appear on thehome screen2404 are not displayed when thehospital bed10 is on battery backup as those functions are not available under battery power. Any motion of any portion of thehospital bed10 has to be engaged individually by the keys on thehard panel64.
In some embodiments, if any of theicons2480,2482,2484,2486,2488, or2496 are activated, animated arrows or other indicators may appear within the icon to indicate that the function is being activated.
Referring now toFIG. 61, theside rail48 is shown with thegraphical user interface66 positioned in acavity3750. The graphical user interface has asurface3752 on the front of thecover3754, which is generally flush with thesurface3756 of thebody1136 of the side rail when thegraphical user interface66 is stowed. Thegraphical user interface66 is pivotable about anaxis3758 if it is gripped by a user at the bottom3762 and lifted upwardly about a pivoting structure that will be described in further detail below. Theaxis3758 is defined by anopening3760 shown inFIG. 137, theopening3760 being formed in a wall in thecavity3750. A second opening, not visible, is aligned with opening3760 on the opposite side ofcavity3750.
Thegraphical user interface66 may be positioned in a cavity ofside rail50 that is a mirror image to thecavity3750. Because of the mirror image aspect, thegraphical user interface66 interfaces with thecircuit board1182 on itsleft head rail48, but thecircuit board1182 is to the right of thegraphical user interface66 on theright head rail50. The switching of hands presents a problem with regard to biasing thegraphical user interface66 to the stowed position ofFIG. 61. This is addressed by the use of a two-directional torsional spring3770 shown inFIG. 84. The graphical user interface includes ahousing3740 and thecover3754 which support the electrical components of thegraphical user interface66. Thecircuit board67 is secured to thehousing3740 by a number ofscrews3768. Thehousing cover3754 supports adisplay65 in aframe3764 formed by thecover3754. Thedisplay65 is covered by abezel3766.
Thehousing3740 and cover3764 relative to the body of the respective side rails on anaxle3762 and abushing3786. Thebushing3786 is received in acutout3792 formed in thecover3754. Another cutout, not visible, is formed on the opposite side of thecover3754. The bearing protects awire harness3788 which connects to thecircuit board67 by reducing the contact the cable has with moving parts. Theaxle3762 is received in theopening3760 and supports rotation of the remainder of the graphical user interface about theaxis3758. Thetorsion spring3770 includes anarm3776 that's received in acavity3778 formed in thehousing3740. Thespring3770 has a group of right-hand wrappedcoils3772 and a group of left hand wrappedcoils3774 interconnected by anarm3776. The right-hand coil group has atab3780 formed on the end thereof. Similarly the left-hand coil3774 has a tab3072 formed on the end of it. Thetabs37823780 and engage theaxle3762 orbushing3786 in ananti-rotation feature3784. Acompression spring3794 provides bias towards the axle into theopening3760 and maintain engagement with thebody1136 through the action of thecompression spring3794.
When thegraphical user interface66 is pivoted about theaxis3758, the right hand coils3772 of thespring3770 biases against the lifting of thegraphical user interface66 in the embodiment ofFIG. 84. However, because of the mirror image aspect ofside rail50 relative toside rail48, theaxle3762 must be positioned on the right side of thehousing3742 appropriately engage in opening similar to theopening3760. Because thespring3770 has both right-hand coils3772 and left-hand coils3774, thespring3770 can be used for either a left-hand or right-hand version of thegraphical user interface66 without the need for having different parts for the assemblies, thereby reducing the cost and complexity of assembly of thegraphical user interface66, regardless of which side of thehospital bed10 it is on.
Referring toFIG. 102, theoverhead arm2842 may support adevice2890 which permits the patient to undertake medication within the patient care environment through agraphical user interface2900 that includes additional functionality. For example, as shown inFIG. 353, the functionality may include the ability for the patient to order food anddrink3780, keep track ofpersonal items3782,order hospital items3784, make adjustments to thehospital bed10 orroom environment3786, request assistance withpersonal care3788, engage in communication external to thepatient room3790, indicate a need to egress from thepatient support apparatus2810 aticon3792, report aproblem3794, contactother caregiver representatives3796, or update their perceivedpain3798, among other items. Further details of the communications capabilities of thedevice2900 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/177,851, filed Feb. 11, 2014 and titled “Workflow Canvas for Clinical Applications,” which is hereby incorporated in its entirety by reference herein. In some embodiments, the graphical user interface three 900 may be in direct contact with the control system400 of thehospital bed10 through either a wired, or wireless connection.
Referring now toFIG. 74, another embodiment of aside rail3800 is configured to have an illuminatedgrip3802 includes adepression3804 formed on the outer side of thegrip3802. A number ofholes3806 are formed in the grip at the depression acircuit board assembly3808 which includes a number of different color LEDs that operate under the same logic as discussed above with regard to thenotification system796. Thecircuit board assembly3808 is connected to thecircuit board1182 by awire harness3810. Thetranslucent overlay3812 is positioned into thedepression3804 to thereby fill the depression3805 and provide a smooth surface at thegrip3802 as shown inFIG. 76A. In the embodiment ofFIG. 76A-76B, theoverlay3812 has anopaque region3814 with atranslucent area3816 about theopaque section3814. As suggested byFIG. 76B the light emitted by the diodes on thecircuit board3808 emit from the translucent area providing a subdued effect. In another embodiment shown inFIG. 75A anoverlay3818 is a solid translucent material which permits theholes3806 two appear much more clearly when the LEDs illuminate. In some environments a brighter illumination such as that suggested by theoverlay3818 may be appropriate. In other instances, theoverlay3812 may be more appropriate to provide the subdued lighting effect.
One detailed embodiment of acaregiver membrane panel1186 that can be positioned on the left head side rail atposition64 is shown inFIG. 62. The hard panel includes anindicator4302 which provides an indicator light4304 to indicate if the patient position monitoring alert system set, and ahard switch4306 that allows the caregiver to pause or silence the alert. Thehospital bed10articulation section4308 is relatively typical and includes alockout switch4310 which permits a caregiver to lock functions of thehospital bed10 such that a patient or visitor cannot operate the powered portions of thehospital bed10. Anindicator section4312 includes areading light indicator4314warning indicator4316 to inform the caregiver that theupper frame24 andload frame26 are being lowered. Ahospital bed10 downindicator4318 to provide an indication to the caregiver as to whether thehospital bed10 is in a low position. Anindicator4320 informs a caregiver if there are any alarm conditions.Indicator4322 provides an indication as to whether thehospital bed10 is in a steer mode.Indicator4323 provides an indication as to whether not thehospital bed10 is on battery power. Anurse call interface4326 provides a standard nurse call interface allowing the nurse to respond to alarms and silence the nurse call.Buttons4328,4330, and4332 all provide a one touch activation of reverse tilt, tilt, and a boost position which is used to help reposition a patient in thehospital bed10. Alockout indicator4334 is positioned adjacent every function that can be locked out and provides an indication that the function is locked out when theindicator4334 is illuminated. Anotherpanel1186 is shown inFIG. 63 and includes all of the functionality of the embodiment ofFIG. 62, further includesleg articulation functionality4336.
Aside rail48 is shown inFIG. 64 specifically for the purpose of showing thepatient interface4340 which includes anurse call button4342 that can be activated to call for a nurse. Thepatient interface4340 also includes ahead movement section4344 which allows the patient to either raise the head with thebutton4346 or lower thehospital bed10 with thebutton4348 the interface is unique in that it also includes a patient sidehead elevation indicator4350 which includes creations of head angle in degrees at4352 and aball4354 that roles in the channel as the head section raises and lowers to provide a patient a direct indication of the elevation of their head section. This permits the patient to take part in their care by having their head raised sufficiently to prevent or reduce the chance for hospital acquired pneumonia, but also provides the patient the opportunity to return thehead deck28 to their preferred elevation if thehead deck28 gets moved.
Referring now to the embodiment ofFIG. 65 theindicator4356 includes aband4358 which provides an indication to the patient of the preferred position of their head elevation when they are in thehospital bed10. In some embodiments the area within theband4350 might be a different color, such as green, for example, to provide the patient an incentive to position the head in that location.
Referring now toFIG. 66, an exemplary embodiment of apanel3728 for apatient pendant3700 is shown. In the illustrative embodiment, the firmness setting on thepatient pendant3700 has five bars that are indicative of the adjustable pressure levels ofmattress1900. The bars are illuminated sequentially, from bottom to top for example, to provide a general indication to the patient as to the current pressure level in the mattress. The more bars that are illuminated, the firmer the mattress is and vice versa. The firmness of themattress1900 can be changed by the patient by activating thelower pressure button4370 or theincrease pressure button4372. Changes in the pressure in the mattress will be indicated by changes in the elimination of the bars of theindicator4374. Thepanel3728 also includes anindicator4376 which, when the alert system is activated, provides an indication to the patient that they should stay inhospital bed10.
Thepatient pendant3700 also includes aNURSE CALL button4360 andLED indicators4364,4366 on thepatient pendant panel3728. The patient can request assistance by pressing NURSE CALL button4362. WhenNURSE CALL button4360 is pressed, nurse call communication to a nurse call system114 is activated and theLED indicator4364 turns on, for example, in red to indicate that the NURSE CALL feature is active. If the patient no longer requires assistance, the patient can inactivate the alert by pressingNURSE CALL button4360 again. To indicate that the nurse call alert is inactive, theLED indicator4366 turns on, for example, in green and theLED indicator4364 turns off.
In some embodiments, theNURSE CALL button4360 may be a deadfront switch that is discernible only if thepatient support apparatus10 is communicatively coupled to a nurse call system. Ifpatient support apparatus10 is not communicatively coupled to the nurse call system, thenbutton4360 cannot be seen onpatient pendant3700. Thus, when thepatient pendant3700 is coupled to thepatient support apparatus10, suchpatient support apparatus10 may or may not be coupled to a nurse call system. If the control system400 determines that thepatient support apparatus10 is not coupled to a nurse call system, theNURSE CALL button4360 on thepatient pendant device4360 is not discernible to the patient. This avoids the patient from misinterpreting theNURSE CALL button4360 when the patient requires assistance and prevents the patient from pressing theNURSE CALL button4360 when thepatient support apparatus10 is not connected to the nurse call system. If thepatient support apparatus10 is not connected to the nurse call system, the patient may be required to access other available nurse call communications to alert the nurse or caregiver.
In the illustrative embodiment, thepatient support apparatus10 further includes a SELF-EGRESS feature. As shown inFIG. 66, thepatient pendant3728 further includesEXIT ASSIST button4368 on thepatient pendant panel3728, which is configured to facilitate the patient in exiting thepatient support apparatus10. When the patient presses theEXIT ASSIST button4368 on thepatient pendant3700, the EXIT ASSIST mode ofpatient support apparatus10 is activated. In response to the activation of the EXIT ASSIST mode, the control system of thepatient support apparatus10 automatically activates a nurse call to system to notify a nurse or caregiver and turns on theLED indicator4364 to indicate the nurse call status. The control system400 causes thebody support1902 of themattress1900, when present, to inflate to provide a firm surface for the patient to exit from.
In general, the articulatedthigh deck30,foot deck34 and load frame2008 are all placed in a flat and horizontal position, with thehead section28 being raised to assist the patient with their exiting.
In some embodiments, the predetermined patient egress configuration is programmable and may vary depending on the patient. Such programming is accomplished by a caregiver using thegraphical user interface66, for example. In some embodiments, in response toEXIT ASSIST button4368 being pressed, the control system400 may further vertically lower theupper frame28 downwardly towardbase frame20 to facilitate the patient to exit thepatient support apparatus10. The patient or a caregiver may release theEXIT ASSIST button4368 anytime to stop movement ofpatient support apparatus10 into the patient egress configuration.
In some embodiments, the EXIT ASSIST mode may also track the patient egress activities. In such embodiment, the date and time at which the patient pressed theEXIT ASSIST button4368 may be automatically stored in a patient's EMR accordingly, the patient egress data is charted into the patient's EMR automatically or via commands entered onpatient support apparatus10 without the need for subsequent confirmatory actions by a caregiver at remote computers. In some embodiments, subsequent confirmatory actions may be required at EMR system computer prior to entry of data into the patient's EMR. However, systems in which information is charted or stored in the patient's EMR via caregiver actions atpatient support apparatus10 may not require subsequent actions at remote computer by the same or a different caregiver.
As shown inFIG. 80, another embodiment of amattress enclosure3820 includes atop cover3822 and abottom cover3824. Thetop cover3822 is secured to thebottom cover3824 through azipper3826. The seam between thetop cover3822 in thebottom cover3824 is protected by use of anouter strip3828 and aninner strip3830. Referring now toFIG. 82, thetop cover3822 is coupled to theouter strip3828, a web of first-half3832 of thezipper3826, and theinner strip3830 by stitching3834 then the material of thecover3822 is wrapped around anend3836 of thestrip3828. As shown inFIG. 81, thelower cover3824 is under wrapped and then stitched to aweb3838 of thezipper3826. Theinner strip3830 provides backing to thezipper3826 reducing the opportunity for materials inside of thecovers3822,3824 to get tangled in thezipper3826. In addition thefirst strip3830 supports thezipper3826 if theflap3840 formed by the second strip in thetop cover3822 is pulled upwardly. Thestitching3834 will act on the inner strip causing it to engage theweb3838 of the lower half of thezipper3826 thereby encouraging the zipper to stay closed. Thestrips3828,3830 illustratively comprise a material having a Shore A durometer from about 40 to about 85. Thestrips3828,3830 may comprise urethane, polyurethane, low density polyethylene (LDPE), ultra high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMW), thermoplastic elastomers (TPE), or combinations thereof.
In an embodiment of apatient support apparatus3910, afoot deck section3934 has been adapted to include twoports3936 and3938 that connect tohoses3940 and3942 that connect to a left legsequential compression wrap3944, and a right legsequential compression wrap3946. As will be described in further detail below, the disclose control system400 provides an interface for operating an integrated sequential compression device (SCD).
In another embodiment, afoot panel3850 that houses a sequential compression device (SCD)3852 is shown inFIG. 139. Thefoot panel3850 is adapted to haverecesses3854 and3856 which provide access to respectivepneumatic connectors3858 and3860. Thepneumatic connectors3858,3860 function like supports3936 and3938 ofFIG. 77 with thenotches3862 and3864 formed in thefoot panel3850 being ideally located for routing the associated hoses director lead to the patient's leg on the opposite side of thefoot panel3852. Referring to the view ofFIG. 140, thenotch3862 and thenotch3864 are positioned to provide direct access to a patient's lower extremities as would be required with the use of a sequential compression device as suggested inFIG. 77. Thefoot panel3850 ofFIG. 140 supports atransport shelf3866 which is used to assist with the storing of equipment and supplies while a patient is being transported. Thefoot panel3850 has alarge cover3868 which encloses the componentry of theSCD3852. Acontrol board2734 for the sequential compression device is positioned in acavity3870. Similarly apump3872 is positioned in anothercavity3874adjacent cavity3870.
Thepump3872 is connected to asource line3874 by ahose3876 the source line feeds aright valve3878 and aleft valve3880. Thevalves3878,3880 each respectively feed atube3882 or3884 which feed therespective ports3858 and3860. The pressure in eachtube3882,3884 is monitored by arespective sense line3886 or3888 each of which is income indication with thecircuit board2734. Referring now toFIG. 141, thetube3884 connects to abarb3890 of theport3860. Thetube3882 communicates to theport3858 in a similar fashion.FIG. 143 provides an enlarged view ofdepression3856 and theport3860.
Thehospital bed10 has extensive control system400 and various components of the control system400 have been discussed as they relate to the various mechanical structures. However a complete wiring diagram of thehospital bed10 is provided atFIG. 51A-51P. For a better understanding of electrical capabilities ofhospital bed10, discussion of the various significant electrical components will be provided herein. The lefthead side rail48 supports a siderail circuit board1182 which communicates with theMain control board2700 via a network connection. The network structure of thehospital bed10 will be discussed in further detail below, but it is contemplated that some modules of the control system400 will communicate via a controller area network (CAN). A suitable network structure is found in U.S. Pat. No. 7,506,390, titled “PATIENT SUPPORT APPARATUS HAVING CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK” which is incorporated in its entirety by reference herein and with specific reference to the disclosed network structure, including protocols and hardware. A microcontroller that includes several communications interfaces has been found to be suitable for this type of application. For example, microntrollers from ST Microelectronics including part numbers STM32F427, STM32F429, and STM 32F437. A suitable transceiver is a part number MCP2551 transceiver from Microchip. The CANOpen data layer protocol is suitable and as well as a network speed of 1 Mbps. The illustrative embodiment provides multiple network connections and protocols that may be used between various components.
The left head side rail includes the graphicaluser interface board67 along with thedisplay65. Anantenna2706 is electrically connected to the graphicaluser interface board67, theantenna2706 providing a capability for near field communications from the lefthead side rail48. The siderail circuit board1182 includes a nearfield communication antenna2712 and anambient light sensor2714. Theside rail48 also includes thespeaker1102 discussed above and anRFID module2716 may be used to identify people or equipment who approach or come in close proximity with theside rail48. The siderails also include various versions of hard panel's such as the two shown inFIGS. 62-63, or thepanel1180 shown inFIG. 65. While the hard panels are not shown in the wiring diagram, it should be understood that some permutation of those hard panel's will be found on most embodiments of thehospital bed10. Also not shown on the wiring diagram is thelight strip1604 which is optionally connected to the siderail circuit board1182 and some embodiments.
The control system400 also includes acommunications board2708 which connects to external communications through anurse call cable2710. Thecommunications board2708 is supported on theload frame28 as shown inFIG. 47B. Thecommunications board2708 is housed in anenclosure4300 as suggested inFIG. 47D, theenclosure4300 being secured to theload frame28. The control system400 also includes thepatient pendant board2724 which is directly connected to theMain control board2700. In addition a USBdiagnostic port2718 is coupled to theMain control board2700. Theport2718 is available to permit service technicians to connect directly to the Main control board through theUSB port2718.
Theoverhead arm2726 includes aninternal circuit board2406 which has functionality similar to the functionality of thependant board2724, theoverhead arm board2406 communicating with theMain control board2700 via a SPI interface. In addition there is a lefthead rail switch2720 and a right head rails switch2722 which monitor the position of thesiderails48,50 respectively and provide that information to the control system400 to use as will be discussed in further detail below. Thehead actuator650 is coupled to the Main control board through ajunction box2410, the junction box shown inFIG. 47A. Structurally, the junction box has ahousing2412 which is secured to thehead deck28 moves with the head deck as it moves from between raised and lowered positions. The Main control board is positioned adjacent thecommunications board2708 in thepan560. The Main control board includes anenclosure2414 which protects theMain control board2700. Also shown inFIG. 51E is the CPR detectswitch1552 is connected to theMain control board2700.
TheMain control board2700 performs a significant amount of the logic for thehospital bed10 and further includes a system on a module (SOM)2730 the system or module controlling communications from the Main control board2702 external devices and systems. A Wi-FiBluetooth® antenna2728 is coupled to theSOM2730. TheMain control board2700 is also coupled to aspeaker2732 that provides alarms and verbal alerts. In some embodiments the Main control board supports anaccelerometer2416 that is used to determine the angle of inclination of theload frame26 of thehospital bed10.
The sequentialcompression device system2734 is connected to theMain control board2700. Switches to determine the position of the left and right foot rails2736,2738 respectively are also coupled to theMain control board2700. The load beams522,524,526,528 are all connected to theMain control board2700 as well. An embodiment of thehospital bed10 can have up to seven linear actuators including anhead actuator650, andauxiliary wheel actuator334, a Hi-Lo actuator252 which powers thehead lift linkage29, a Hi-Lo actuator250 which powers thefoot end linkage27, athigh actuator584 for moving the articulatedthigh deck30, afoot actuation actuator920 pivoting thefoot deck34 relative to theload frame28, and a foot extension andretraction actuator730. Each of the actuators includes internal electrical limits as well as internal position sensing capabilities utilizing either a potentiometer or a Hall-effect sensor.
Thecontrol system1700 also includes abattery charge board2740 which is positioned in the head end of the base frame as shown inFIG. 12. The battery charge board is coupled to a pair ofnightlights2742,2744 and thesensor242 that determines the orientation of the brake/steer petals. Thebattery charge board2740 also in includes aphone jack2750 is available for certain nurse call systems. Thebatteries2746,2748 are coupled to the battery charge board with thebattery charge board2740 managing the charging of thebatteries2746,2748. While not shown in any of the drawings, and AC/DC power supply2752 receives inlet power from a power cord. The control system also utilizes a real-time locating tag2754 which is not electrically coupled to any of the components of the control system400, but is available to provide identification of thehospital bed10 based on information stored on theRTLs2754. Thecontrol board384 for the powereddrive wheel assembly92 indicates with theLED board108, theright handle assembly394, theleft handle assembly396, thedeployment actuator334, and thedrive motor330. Theboard384 also communicates with thespeed controller385 which provides the drive signals for thedrive motor330. Thebatteries386,386 are also coupled to and charged by theboard384. Thecircuitry793 for theindicator system792 is also coupled to the Main control board.
Theair control board2198 is an electrical communication with theMain control board2700 but also controls the manifold2168, the mattress detectswitch2230, and theblower2170. The mattress detectswitch2230 is operable to determine if a premium mattress, such asmattress1900, is coupled to the pneumatic system so that theair control board2198 will have information pertaining to which functions should be available for the mattress that's attached. Theright side rail50 includes much of the same structure as theleft side rail48 but also includes the personal electronic device chargingport board1216.
In general, the control system400 could be arranged in many different configurations, but the contemplated embodiments would employ a mix of network communications protocols depending on the functionality required. The communication circuitry may be configured to use any one or more communication technology (e.g., wired or wireless communications) and associated protocols (e.g., Ethernet, Bluetooth®®, Wi-Fi®, WiMAX, etc.) to effect such communication.
Analgorithm4000 for operating the scale system of thehospital bed10 is disclosed inFIGS. 377A-377C. The process begins atstep4002 progresses to displaying the way position indicator in the last tier timestamp on a user interface atstep4004. When a user selects the way function atstep4006, the algorithm advances to adecision step4008 and determines whether thehospital bed10 is in the optimal weighing position. If it is not, the algorithm progresses to prompt the caregiver atstep4010 to make a determination as to whether or not to continue with the weighing process. Based on input from the user atdecision step4012, the algorithm either progresses to adecision step4014, or returns to the scale menu atstep4016. If the caregiver chooses to continue to step4014, the control system400 determines whether or not the patient location is acceptable and stable if it is, algorithm regresses to generate a prompt atstep4018. However if the patient's location is not acceptable or stable the algorithm advances to aprompt step4020 informing the caregiver that the patient position and/or the scale is unstable and requiring the caregiver to confirm whether to continue or not. If the caregiver chooses to continue atdecision step4022 then the algorithm advances to the prompt4018. The caregiver chooses not to continue then the system returns to thescale menu step4016.
Atstep4018, the caregiver is prompted to confirm that protocols are being met and provides an indicator that the weight is being taken. The system then advances to step4020 and provides additional prompts indicating that thehospital bed10 should not be touched by the caregiver and should otherwise remain in a stable condition. Once theprocess step4020 is complete, the algorithm advances to processstep4022 where the weight is taken and analyzed. The algorithm then advances to thedecision step4024 to compare the current weight with the maximum weight permitted on thehospital bed10. If the weight measured does exceed the maximum weight than the algorithm advances to astep4026 providing instructions to the caregiver to make a correction to the condition. The caregiver is then prompted as to whether not to continue at adecision step4028. If the caregiver decides not to continue, or the condition times out, then the system returns to the basic scale menu atstep4030.
If the caregiver continues atstep4028, then the system advances to aprocess step4032. If the measured weight was less than the maximum allowable weight adecision step4024, then the algorithm advances to processstep4032. Theprocess step4032, the caregiver is provided a display of the weight along with a difference in the current weight from the previous, with additional information about whether that change is above or below threshold. The caregiver is then prompted to determine whether to accept the weight and log it.Process step4032 has a countdown timer that is displayed to the caregiver. If the caregiver does not accept the weight and log it within a predetermined time period, such as two minutes, for example, then the system will timeout and return to the scale menu. The algorithm progresses to adecision step4034 where the caregiver is prompted to accept and log the weight data. If caregiver chooses not to accept and log the weight data, the algorithm advances from astep4036 to a process step at4038 where the caregiver receives a prompt inquiring as to whether or not to discard the weight. If the weight is discarded, the caregiver is provided another prompt atstep4040 inquiring as to whether they will take another weight measurement. Depending on the response from the caregiver atdecision step4042, the algorithm will either return to the scale menu at4044 or return to the main menu at4046. Returning again todecision step4034, if the caregiver chooses to accept and log the weight, the caregiver is prompted to save the weight and time to thehospital bed10 atprocess step4048. The caregiver is then prompted to upload the weight and time to the network at4050 a decision step at4052 determines whether or not the upload was successful. If it was not, then the caregiver will be prompted atstep4054 that the upload failed in the system will return to the main menu. If the upload was successful, then a prompt atprocess step4056 informs the caregiver that the save and upload was successful. The algorithm then returns to the main menu.
Analgorithm4060 begins when a user selects the scale menu structure from thegraphical user interface66 and a menu structure advances to the scale screen atstep4062. At the scale screen the way position indicator and the last tare timestamp. While the information is being displayed at4064, a user may select the tare option atstep4066 which advances the algorithm to step4068. Atstep4068 the tare position indicator, current weight, and last tare timestamp are all displayed. If the user selects the tare function atstep4070, then the algorithm advances to processstep4072 in which the protocol instructions for taring thehospital bed10 are displayed. The algorithm then advances to adecision step4074 were caregiver chooses whether to continue. If the caregiver does not give a response in a reasonable time, such as two minutes, for example, or if the caregiver chooses not to continue, the algorithm returns to the scale screen at step4064. If the caregiver chooses to continue, algorithm advances todecision step4076 to determine if thehospital bed10 is in the optimal taring position. If thehospital bed10 is not in the optimal taring position, then the hour them advances to processstep4078 where the caregiver is prompted that thehospital bed10 is in theincorrect hospital bed10 position and provides correction instructions. The algorithm then returns back toprocess step4068.
If thehospital bed10 is in the optimal taring position, the algorithm advances todecision step4080 where it compares the weight being detected to a minimum weight. If the detected weight is less than the minimum weight than the algorithm advances to processstep4086 which provides an indication to the caregiver that the weight was too high and that the tare was incomplete. Fromprocess step4086, the algorithm returns to processstep4068. If the weight was not greater than the minimum weight than the algorithm progresses to step4082 where the caregiver is prompted regarding process instructions and a progress indicator is displayed. The algorithm then advances to step4084 where the weight is acquired and analyzed. Algorithm then advances to processstep4088 where the zero is saved along with the time that the tare occurred and stored in memory on thehospital bed10. The process then advances to step4090 where the zeros displayed along with the change from the previous zero. If the change in tare weight is larger than a threshold, the system will prompt the caregiver to consider performing the taring operation again. Process then advances thestep4100 and returns to the main menu.
Given the extensive information available to the control system400, having thecontrol board384 for the powereddrive wheel assembly92 in communication with other nodes on the network of thehospital bed10 presents the opportunity for significantly improved performance. A series of algorithms are provided inFIGS. 379-384 which provide an overview of the operation of the powereddrive wheel assembly92 utilizing the information available from thehospital bed10. Analgorithm4110, shown onFIG. 379, is a state diagram that is operated by the control logic of thecontrol board384 to determine the appropriate mode of operation of the powereddrive wheel assembly92. In afirst state4112, the drive is not deployed, meaning that thedrive wheel214 has not been deployed to contact the floor by theactuator334. The algorithm proceeds to adecision step4114 where it evaluates if the AC power is present. If the AC power is present, thealgorithm4110 advances to aprocess step4116 two charge thebatteries386,386. The algorithm also advances to step4118 to evaluate the opportunity to upgrade software, and if upgraded software is available, to perform the update. The process then returns tostate4112. If AC power is determined not to be present atdecision step4114, the algorithm advances todecision step4122 determine if the break is on. If the break is on, the drive will not deploy so the algorithm returns tostate4112, drive not deployed. If the break is not on atdecision step4120, then the algorithm proceeds tostate4122 confirming that it is acceptable to deploy the drive if a driver request is made.
Analgorithm4124, shown inFIG. 380, monitors for system usage and errors beginning at astep4126 and advancing todecision step4128 to determine if thehospital bed10spowered drive is running. If it is not, the algorithm loops back to thestart4126. If the powered drive is running, then atstep4130, the control system400 collects data regarding the hours of operation of the powered drive. The algorithm then progresses to processstep4132 where the control system400 collects performance data including the drive current, patient weight from the load cells, battery charging statistics, battery charge level, and performance data regarding a number of wheel rotations, slips, or collisions. The algorithm then proceeds to processstep4134 where the algorithm calculates the estimated number of transparent hours left on the battery charge, and the average drive current. This information is then collected by thecontrol board384 atprocess step4136 and transferred to theMain control board2700 where would be accessible by service personnel.
Anotheralgorithm4140 is shown onFIGS. 381A-381C and relates to the operation of the powereddrive wheel assembly92 based on data available from other systems on thehospital bed10. At thefirst step4142, thecontrol board384 for the powereddrive wheel assembly92 reads the load beam data available from the fourload beams522,524,526 and528. Utilizing the load beam data or another signal from other systems of thehospital bed10, thecontrol board384 determines if there is a patient in thehospital bed10 atdecision step4144. If the patient is present the algorithm advances to processstep4146 to set the downforce, current limit and speed to variable value based on the patient's weight. The algorithm then advances to processstep4148 to calculate the center of gravity and patient position. This information is then used at adecision step4150 where the patient position is analyzed to determine if thehospital bed10 is in the optimal height for transport. If it is not, then the algorithm advances to step4152 and prompts an alert to a caregiver to adjust the patient position andhospital bed10 height, returning back toprocess step4148.
If the decision at4150 is that thehospital bed10 is at the appropriate height, the algorithm advances to adecision step4154 to evaluate whether all side rails are up based on signals from the side rail position switches2720,2722,2736, and2730. If thecontrol board384 determines that the side rails are not all up, the algorithm advances to aprocess step4156 which prompts an alert to the caregiver and prevents the drive from beingdrive wheel214 from being deployed. If all of the side rails are up, the algorithm advances to aprocess step4158 to deploy thedrive wheel214. Once a driver request is received from a user, the logic begins to read the data from theaccelerometer4156 located on themain control board2700. The data from the accelerometer is used to determine if thehospital bed10 is level at adecision step4158. If thehospital bed10 is level than the algorithm advances to processstep4160 and maintains standard power limit on the drive motion. If thehospital bed10 is not level then the algorithm advances to adecision step4162 to determine if thehospital bed10 is traveling up an incline or down an incline. If the accelerometer data indicates that thehospital bed10 is traveling up a ramp then the algorithm advances to processstep4164 and response to the incline to increase power and to limit or remove the breaking of thepowered wheel214. If thecontrol board384 determines that thehospital bed10 is traveling down an incline, thenprocess step4166 is invoked and there is additional power applied to limit and the powered drive wheel assembly may begin to apply active breaking. In either case, the algorithm then advances to aprocess step4168 two determine if the drive wheel rotations. The algorithm then advances todecision step4172 determine whether or not the drive wheel motion is consistent with data available from the accelerometer. If it is the algorithm advances to processstep4172 and operation is maintained normally. If the drive wheel motion is inconsistent with the motion detected from the accelerometer, then the algorithm proceeds to processstep4174 where the conditions are diagnosed an alert is provided to a user. In either case the algorithm advances to processstep4176 and continues to monitor operations. If the evaluation atprocess step4144 indicated that thehospital bed10 did not have a patient and it the algorithm would advance to processstep4178 to set operating conditions for anempty hospital bed10.
Analgorithm4180 shown inFIG. 382 describes the logic applied by thecontrol board384 in responding to a request to deploy thepowered wheel214. The process starts atstep4182 which is initiated when a deployed request is received. The other of them then advances to a built-in delay atstep4184 which reduces the opportunity for thecontrol board384 to respond to a transient or inadvertent request. Once the delay has expired the algorithm advances to step4186 where begins to ramp the deployment of the wheel by applying pulse width modulation to step up the power to theactuator334. Once the PWM stepping is complete, the algorithm advances to process4187 which monitors for the activation of a switch in theactuator334 to confirm that theactuator334 is fully deployed. The algorithm that advances the4188 and applies a break through the H-bridge circuitry used to operate the motor of theactuator334. Once the H-bridge break steps are complete, the advances to process4190 confirming the actuator is deployed and then advances to theidle process4192. If a condition changes during the deployment, for example stop request is transferred to thecontrol board384, the algorithm advances to theprocess4194 which stops deployment and then advances to process4188 which applies the H-bridge break. In some instances, there may be a request during deployment to retract thepowered wheel214. In such a case, the auger them advances to process4196 which begins the change direction functions. In the advances to theprocess4188.
Inalgorithm4200, shown atFIG. 383, the system maintains theidle state4202 until a retract request is received, then they ever them advances to process4204 which applies a delay. Once the delay is expiredprocess4206 is invoked to apply pulse width modulation to the retractingactuator334. Once the PWM stepping is complete, algorithm advances to process4208 and continues to retract until the appropriate limit switches met in theactuator334. Once the limit switch is met the algorithm advances to process4210, and then once the inputs and outputs are stable, the algorithm advances to anidle state4212. However, if a stop request is read received while theactuator334 is retracting, the hour them advances to theprocess4216 to stop the retraction and advances to processstep4210. In some cases a deployed request may be provided in the algorithm will advance to process4214 which changes the direction of the motion of theactuator334. The algorithm then advances again to process4210.
Yet anotheralgorithm4220 addresses the control of the power to thecontrol board384 for operation of the powereddrive wheel assembly92. Referring toFIG. 384, when the powered drive wheel assembly is in a power offstate4222, a power up request will advance the algorithm to a power up delay process it4224. Once a 102nd delay has expired, the request is considered valid and the algorithm advances to theprocess4226 where a controller power up request is advanced. Algorithm advances to process4228 and waits for 100 ms delay to expire before powering up the controller. Theprocess4230 waits for the delay to expire and the algorithm advances to a state where the drive control board is powered4232. Upon receipt of the power down request, the algorithm advances to aprocess4234 which waits for a delay and once the delay timer has expired the powered wheel assembly returns to the power off state at4236.
In another embodiment of ascreen2500 shown inFIG. 70, theportion2464 ofstatus section2438 does not provide any indication when themattress1900 is absent as there is no functionality available. Similarly the foot control retraction section2294 is blank when theactuator730 is absent as there is no powered extension and retraction offoot deck34. In the embodiment ofscreen2500, thesection2460 displays anicon2502 which provides an indication that patient position monitoring system is inactive with atext box2504 providing text explaining the status of the alerts for the patient position monitoring system. Thetext box2504 andtext box2468 ofFIG. 68 are temporarily displayed but disappear after a period of time, such as five seconds, for example. In the display shown by ascreen2510 ofFIG. 144, thealerts icon2590 is shown to be activated which invokes thealerts menu structure2410.FIGS. 144-180 show the various screens of thealert menu structure2410 with a screen2512 being displayed upon activation of thealert icon2590. The screen2512 includes an expandedinteraction section2442 which expands to overlie theinformation section2436 and thestatus section2438. Screen2512 displays two options including avirtual button2514 that is associated with ahospital bed10 exit alert menu structure and avirtual button2516 associated with a chair exit menu structure as shown inFIG. 145.
When thevirtual button2514 is activated, the menu structure advances to ascreen2518 shown inFIG. 150. However, if the weight supported on thehospital bed10 is too low, ascreen2520 is displayed with the text indication that the alert system failed to set because the weight was too low. The caregiver has to activate avirtual button2522 to return to thehome screen2404. If thevirtual button2522 is not activated, thescreen2520 will timeout and return to thehome screen2404 after a period of time, such as two minutes, for example. Thehospital bed10 exit alert will not set if the weight on thehospital bed10 is too high and ascreen2524 will be displayed with text indicating that the system failed to set because the weight was too high while displaying thevirtual button2522 which allows the caregiver to return to thehome screen2404. Thescreen2524 will also timeout, in a manner similar to thescreen2520.
In some cases, if thehospital bed10 is not in an appropriate position or the patient is not appropriately positioned on thehospital bed10, thehospital bed10 exit alert will not set. The control system400 provides an indication to a caregiver through thegraphical user interface66 with ascreen2526 providing text indicating that thehospital bed10 exit alarm failed to set with a text prompt2532 prompt suggesting that the caregiver attempt to level thehospital bed10 and try to set the system again. Thescreen2526 times out after a period of time or can be closed out by activating thevirtual button2522 displayed onscreen2526 to return to thehome screen2404. If the control system400 determines that the patient is not appropriately positioned on thehospital bed10, ascreen2528 is displayed providing a notification that thehospital bed10 exit alarm failed to set.Screen2528 provides a text prompt2530 instructing the caregiver to center the patient and then set thehospital bed10 exit. The caregiver is given the option of activating avirtual button2534 causes the system to return to thehome screen2404, or adjusting the patient in activating avirtual button2536 to make another attempt to set thehospital bed10 exit alert.
If no errors are detected, thescreen2518 is displayed and the caregivers given the option of choosing between threevirtual buttons2540,2546,2548 to set thehospital bed10 exit alert in one of three modes, or avirtual button2550 which turns off thehospital bed10 exit alert system and returns the display to thehome screen2404. If the caregiver chooses thevirtual button2540, thehospital bed10 exit alert is set to be sensitive to changes in the position of the patient and provide an alert if the patient does change position. The setting is the most sensitive of the three settings available in thehospital bed10 exitalert menu structure2412. Once thevirtual button2540 is selectedscreen2552, which is shown inFIG. 152, is displayed to provide a text notification that the position mode is being set with a large version of aposition mode icon2560 being displayed while thehospital bed10 exit alert system is set. Once the position mode is set, ascreen2554, shown inFIG. 153, is displayed with theicon2560 being displayed in thestatus section2438 and thetext box2504 temporarily providing a text prompt indicating thathospital bed10 exit alerting has been set.
If thevirtual button2546 is activated, then ascreen2556, shown inFIG. 154, is displayed. Thevirtual button2546 activates the exiting mode of thehospital bed10 exit alerts. In this mode, the control system400 monitors to determine if the patient moves towards the edge of thehospital bed10, indicating the patient intends to exit thehospital bed10. If such a movement is determined to be occurring, the control system400 will provide an indication that the alert condition exists. While the exiting mode is being set, a large version of theicon2462 is displayed on thescreen2556 with a text prompt in forming a user that the exiting mode is being set. Once the exiting mode is successfully set, thescreen2558 shown inFIG. 155 is displayed. Onscreen2558, thetext box2504 provides the temporary indication that thehospital bed10 exit alert system is active and theicon2462 is displayed in thestatus section2438 to provide an indication of the type of alert that is set.
If thevirtual button2548 onscreen2518 is selected, then ascreen2562, shown inFIG. 151, providing atext message2564 informing the user that the mode associated withvirtual button2548, the out of hospital bed mode, will only provide an alert if the patient is completely out of thehospital bed10. The user must confirm that this is acceptable by activating avirtual button2566 to allow the out of hospital bed alert to be set, or must select avirtual button2568 canceling the out of hospital bed mode and returning toscreen2518. If thevirtual button2566 is activated, then ascreen2570, shown inFIG. 156, is displayed with a large version of an out ofhospital bed10icon2572 being displayed along with a text prompt in forming a user that the out of hospital bed alert setting is being set. Once the out of hospital bed alert setting is set, ascreen2574, shown inFIG. 157, is displayed with the out ofhospital bed10icon2572 being displayed in thestatus section2438 and thetext box2502 being temporarily displayed.
If thevirtual button2516 associated with the setting of the chair exitalert menu structure2414 is activated, ascreen2576, shown inFIG. 158, is displayed providing a user the opportunity to activate avirtual button2578 or avirtual button2580. Thevirtual button2580 will cause thealert menu structure2410 to be terminated and thehome screen2404 to be displayed. If thevirtual button2578 is activated, and a patient is properly positioned in a chair2582, shown inFIG. 60.
If thevirtual button2516 associated with the setting of the chair exitalert menu structure2414 is activated, ascreen2576, shown inFIG. 158, is displayed providing a user the opportunity to activate avirtual button2578 or avirtual button2580. Thevirtual button2580 will cause thealert menu structure2410 to be terminated and thehome screen2404 to be displayed. If thevirtual button2578 is activated, and a patient is properly positioned in a chair2582 shown inFIG. 60 thenscreen4390 shown inFIG. 159 is displayed while the chair exit sets. If the chair exit alert effectively sets, then the menu advances toscreen4392 shown inFIG. 160 which is a home screen providing the status of the chair exit in thetext box2504 and displaying a chair exit alertactive icon4394 in thestatus section2438. Once the home screen times out with the chair exit alert set, the menu advances to ascreen4396 shown inFIG. 165. Similarly, if the home screen shown inFIG. 155 times out, then thescreen4398 shown inFIG. 161 is displayed while the bed exit is active, including displaying the appropriate icon based on what the setting is for the alert.
If the chair alert is set but there is no patient in the chair, thescreen4400 shown inFIG. 164 will be displayed.Screen4400 gives a caregiver the opportunity to turn the alerts off by activating avirtual button4402. The control system400 is also operable to let the caregiver know if the communication between thehospital bed10 and another device or system is lost. For example, ascreen4404, shown inFIG. 166 is displayed if the nurse call cable or a Bluetooth® connection is lost. Avirtual button4406 allows the caregiver to acknowledge the message and return to the home screen. The message does not timeout, but is displayed continuously until addressed. However, if the wired connection is lost, the control system400 will automatically connect via the wireless connection, Bluetooth®, for example.
If a bed exit alert is triggered thescreen408, shown inFIG. 167, will appear with anicon4410 indicating that the alarm condition has been met. Avirtual button4412 allows the caregiver to silence the alarm. If the alarm is silenced in the patient is still on the bed, the menu structure advances toscreen4414 shown inFIG. 168. The monitoring system will return to monitoring within 30 seconds with a countdown timer showing the time to the restart of the alert. The caregiver can select from multiple virtual buttons with avirtual button4416 extending the silenced alert for one minute. Avirtual button4418 may be activated to turn the alert off. Avirtual button4420 may be activated to commence with transferring the patient to a chair. Avirtual button4422 allows the silencing of the alert to be extended for five minutes. In avirtual button4424 causes the alert to be resumed. It should be noted that thevirtual button4420 does not appear if the chair exit system is not available by Bluetooth®.
Ifvirtual button4416 is selected then thescreen4426 shown inFIG. 169 is displayed with the one minute countdown timer being active. If the five-minutevirtual button4422 is selected thenscreen4428, shown inFIG. 170, is displayed. It should be noted that all of thevirtual buttons4416,4418,4420,4422,4424 are available in eitherscreen4426 or4428. If thevirtual button4412 is selected atscreen4408, the menu structure advances directly toscreen4430 which prompts a caregiver that the bed is waiting for the patient to reenter the bed. Presumably the caregiver is aware of the patient's exit from the bed in his addressing the issue without turning the alerts off. Thevirtual button4420 is available atscreen4430. Ifvirtual button4420 is selected at any time during a bed exit alert, the menu structure will advance toscreen4432 displayed inFIG. 174.Screen4432 provides the prompt that the chair is waiting for the patient to be positioned in the chair. The alert offvirtual button4418 is available inscreen4432. If a caregiver attempts to navigate away from eitherscreen4434 or4432 then the home screen shown inFIG. 172 will be displayed showing that the alarm is silenced in thetext box2504.
If the patient enters the chair whilescreen4432 is displayed, and the menu structure will return toscreen2576 shown inFIG. 158.
When chair exit alerting is active and a patient exits the chair, thescreen4440 shown inFIG. 175 will be displayed. Thevirtual buttons4412 is available and if activated while the patient is in the chair the chair monitor resumes monitoring after 30 seconds as indicated byscreen4442 shown inFIG. 176 if the patient is not in the chair the menu structure advances toscreen4444 shown inFIG. 179 and the chair monitor waits for the patient to return to the chair. The caregiver can select eithervirtual button442244416 atscreen4442 to extend the alert silence. Avirtual button4446 also appears which, when activated allows the patient to be transferred to the bed which will result in thescreen4448 shown inFIG. 180 being displayed. The alert offvirtual button4418 is also available and in any case where thevirtual button4418 is activated, the system will return to the home screen. For clarification should be understood thatscreens4450 or4452 are only displayed whenvirtual button4416 orvirtual button4422 are activated, respectively. If the patient returns to the bed whilescreen4448 is active then the menu structure returns to the bed monitoring shown inFIG. 155.
Now referencing the scale zeromenu flow2418, the menu structure begins with thescreen4460 shown inFIG. 188. Upon selection of thescale icon2598 the menu structure advances toscreen4462 shown inFIG. 189. Selecting the zerovirtual button4464 the screen advances to ascreen4466 allows the user to choose between a new patientvirtual button4468 and a re-zerovirtual button4470. Selecting the new patientvirtual button4468 advances to thereminder screen4472 shown inFIG. 183 the user can choose between canceling by pressing avirtual button4474 which causes the menu structure to return to thescreen4466, selecting thevirtual button4476 which causes the menu structure to advance to thescreen4478 shown inFIG. 181, or the user can choose to continue by selecting the to continue, choosing the continuebutton4480 advances to screen4482 which causes the bed to go into a zero mode with the prompt shown inFIG. 184. If the bed successfully zeros, then the menu structure advances toscreen4484 shown inFIG. 187. If thescreen4484 is touched then the menu structure advances toscreen4486 shown inFIG. 186, which is a home screen with an indication that the bed is patient ready. If thescreen4486 times out then the menu structure advances toscreen4488 which the “ready for new patient” messages displayed with a dimmed screen as shown inFIG. 185. The bedside sidle until the patient is placed on the bed. In some instances during the operation ofscreen4482, a problem will be detected and the system will advance toscreen4490 shown inFIG. 182. The caregiver will have to respond to the error and restart the process.
If the bed is out of position atscreen4472, the menu structure advances toscreen4492 shown inFIG. 191. The user is given the opportunity to adjust the position of the bed and if an appropriate position is achieved then the menu structure will return toscreen4482 and resume the process. If the bed is in the correct position when the error occurs, then the menu structure advances toscreen4494 where the caregiver is prompted to make adjustments to the bed.
If the caregiver selects the re-zerovirtual button4470 inscreen4466 and the menu structure advances to areminder screen4500 shown inFIG. 196. The caregiver can activatevirtual button4482 continue orvirtual button4474 to return toscreen4466. If the caregiver chooses to continue the system advances toscreen4502 shown inFIG. 197 and the successful zeroing will result in ascreen4504. If the difference is within an acceptable change then ascreen4506 is displayed to prompt a caregiver. If the weight is too great then thescreen4508 is displayed in the process is restarted10 is complete, the menu structure advances tomenu4510 shown inFIG. 199 which is a home screen with a zero scale. It should be noted that the scale operation can be locked out and ascreen4512 shown inFIG. 195 will appear to prompt a caregiver to resolve the issue.
Now referencing the scale weighmenu structure2424 shown inFIG. 67, the process begins with thescreen4520 shown inFIG. 208 selection of thescale icon2598 causes the menu structure to advance toscreen4522 shown inFIG. 210. Selection of the weighvirtual button4524 advances the menu structure to screen4526 shown inFIG. 211. Selection of the virtual button to2566 causes the weight to be taken in thescreen4528 to be displayed as shown inFIG. 212. If a user chooses to select the savevirtual button4530 then the weight is saved as shown inscreen4532 inFIG. 213. The menu structure then advances toscreen4534 shown inFIG. 225 where user is prompted as to whether or not they want to chart the weight. Choosing yes which is associated with thevirtual button4536 will advance toscreen4538 inFIG. 226, if the patient is identified. If the patient is identified then there is a confirmation step where thevirtual button4536 needs to be selected again. Which causes the menu flow to advance toscreen4540 where the caregiver logs in and then the menu structure advances toscreen4542 to prompt the caregiver to decide whether to chart additional information or not. This is the path that occurs if there are no errors and no issues with information.
For example atscreen4544 inFIG. 200 the user could be prompt to remove a lockout on the scale operation. Inscreen4546 shown inFIG. 205, the scale will not operate if the patient is not in the required position or if elements of the bed are out of an acceptable range. As noted inFIG. 201, the prompts may identify actions to be taken by the caregiver. However if the caregiver moves the bed to an acceptable position, an indication of that change will be shown on the screen as shown inscreen4548 ofFIG. 201.Screen4548 has the addition of the check marks to indicate that the appropriate change has been made the same process occurs with a transition fromscreen4550 inFIG. 2012screen4552 inFIG. 203.
Now referring to ascreen4554 shown inFIG. 204, holding thekilogram icon4556 causes the last weight taken to be displayed at4558 which allows it to be compared to the current weight. The same capability is present in ascreen4560 shown inFIG. 207 with the units in pounds. Referring toscreen4562 inFIG. 206, the system will allow a weight to be taken when the bed is not in the proper position. However an individual must acknowledge that is not in the optimum position and therefore the weight would not be accurate.Screen4564 shown inFIG. 209 illustrates what happens if the weight is taken in the wrong unit such as the weight that was taken and accepted atscreen4528 can be converted to pounds and saved as indicated byscreen4564 when the weight is saved a prompt such as that shown inscreen4566 inFIG. 214. If the weight is not saved the caregivers given the option of discarding the weight or going back atscreen4568, shown inFIG. 215. If it is chosen to discard the weight, a prompt confirms it in ascreen4570 shown inFIG. 216. If an error arises, a prompt screen will identify the problem for the caregiver such as inscreen4572 shown inFIG. 217 which prompts the caregiver to center the patient an attempt to re-way.FIGS. 218-219 show additional error messages.
InFIG. 221, a prompt is displayed if the patient is not identified when the caregiver is attempting to chart. Resolution of the charting issue is accomplished through the prompts inFIG. 222. If the caregiver attempts to give the incorrect password inscreen4540 inFIG. 227 the prompt inFIG. 223 appears. The system will also inform the caregiver if automated charting is unavailable as indicated inFIG. 224.
With reference to the chartingmenu structure2428 an illustrative set of screen flows are shown inFIGS. 249-267. The navigation begins atFIG. 255 where the lower arrow is selected to advance themenu section2442 expose thecharting icon2596 is shown inFIG. 256. Selection of thecharting icon2596 advances toFIG. 257. However prior toFIG. 257, an error may occur as shown inFIG. 248. If no error occurs, fromFIG. 257 the structure can be advanced to eitherFIG. 258, orFIG. 249. Choosing yes onFIG. 257 advances toFIG. 258 where the caregiver can logon. In the illustrative embodiment, two minutes of inactivity will cause the caregiver to be logged off. In such a case the screenFIG. 250 will appear. Once logged in the menu advances toFIG. 259 the selection of choices on the screen disclosed onFIG. 259 prompting advances to other screens. Selecting repositioning advances toFIG. 263 selecting patient safety advances toFIG. 264.FIG. 264 advances toFIG. 267. Choosing pain/potty inFIG. 259 advances toFIG. 260. If the caregiver chooses to chart items inFIG. 259 then the menu structure advances toFIG. 251. And fromFIG. 251 menu advances toFIG. 254. However if the system is unable to send the data, then the menu will advance toFIG. 252 and fromFIG. 252 toFIG. 253.FIG. 249 appears if the no selection is made atFIG. 257. If the caregiver is unsuccessful logging in atFIG. 258,FIG. 262 appears. FromFIG. 263, eitherFIG. 265 orFIG. 266 is invoked. If there is a challenge with the connection atFIG. 256,FIG. 261 appears.
Reference to the surface menu structure ofFIG. 67,FIGS. 229-247 include the basic screen flows beginning with the screen atFIG. 238. Upon selection of thesurface icon2592, the menu structure advances toFIG. 239. Selection of the left turn function advances the menu structure twoFIG. 240 where the comfort function is not displayed because the comfort function is not available during turn assist or Max inflate functions. The menu structure than advances toFIG. 234 where a text prompt is provided. The structure than advances toFIG. 235 where the turn function is activated in the menu structure advances toFIG. 236.FIG. 236 displays a screen that provides a status of the turn function as it is ongoing, including a countdown timer. It should be noted that the normal, right turn, and Max inflate functions are all still available while the left turn is occurring. The menu structure then advances toFIG. 237 which is a depiction of the home screen showing the ongoing turn activity as a home screen can be displayed while a function is active.
In some cases, turn assist will fail to start. In such a case the menu structure advances toFIG. 230 which provides a prompt. An alternative prompt is shown atFIG. 231. If a user selects right turn atFIG. 240, the menu structure advances toFIG. 232 to provide the caution prompt and then advances toFIG. 233 where the surface menu is displayed with the countdown timer. In some cases, such as if a side rail is down, turn assist will be disabled as shown inFIG. 229.
Choosing an alternative path, if the comfort function is selected atFIG. 239, the menu structure advances toFIG. 241 which shows the comfort function highlighted. Once the comfort function is selected, the menu structure advances toFIG. 242 where a user can make adjustments to the comfort by zone or enable a patient to make adjustments to comfort from the patient pendant. In some cases, comfort adjust may not be available. As will be described below, the bed can be configured such that comfort adjust is not an available option.
FIG. 244 begins a sequence of screens associated with the Max inflate function which can be chosen from the air surface control screen shown inFIG. 240. When the Max inflate function is chosen atFIG. 244 as indicated by the highlighting, the menu structure advances toFIG. 245 which shows the time remaining in Max inflate. The menu structure then advances fromFIG. 245 toFIG. 246 which is a home screen displaying the status of the air surface. As the Max inflate function times out, a prompt pops up atFIG. 247 to inform a caregiver and inquire as to whether a timer should be reset.
Now referencing the Bluetooth® menu structure2426,FIGS. 268-285 is directed to the Bluetooth® menu structure. The Bluetooth® menu structure starts withFIG. 272, butFIG. 272 does not show theBluetooth® icon2602 in themain menu section2440. Thus a user has to navigate using the navigation arrow in the lower right corner of the screen ofFIG. 272 to expose the Bluetooth® icon as shown inFIG. 273. Selection of theBluetooth® icon2602 advances toFIG. 274 which provides a listing of available devices showing the call light connected. The user can select one of the devices by a touching the screen in the menu structure will advance toFIG. 275 to connect the device. In some cases,FIG. 268 will appear if another device is searching for Bluetooth® connection. AtFIG. 269 thegraphical user interface66 provides prompts to a user for connecting a device.
If the connection completes atFIG. 275 the menu structure advances toFIG. 276 which shows other available devices which may be connected or disconnected. Once the Bluetooth® menu structure times out, the home screen shown atFIG. 277 is displayed and displays the Bluetooth® icon if a Bluetooth® connection has been made. If the connection fails atFIG. 275,FIG. 278 provides prompting for resolving the issue.FIG. 279 assists with disconnecting a device.FIG. 280 is a prompt that appears after a bed has been transported to assist with connecting the bed to a Bluetooth® call light. The menu structure then progresses toFIG. 281 to assist with the connection.FIG. 282 indicates the connection is being made andFIG. 285 confirms the completion of the connection. On the other hand, if the bed returns to a room and makes an immediate Bluetooth® connection, a prompt such as that prompt atFIG. 283 appears giving the opportunity to disconnect the device and correctly connected atFIG. 284.
FIGS. 286-352 are all screens that appear in thepreferences menu structure2430. Various settings are available to the caregivers and two technical support teams through throughout the preferences menu structure.
FIGS. 354-376 are screenshots of screens assisted with the operation of a sequential compression device controlled from the graphical user interface.
As discussed above, thehospital bed10 has ongoing communications amongst components of thehospital bed10, and accessories in the patient room, and with external information systems including electronic medical records. One of the challenges of such a broad array of communications links is the ability to maintain security and data integrity. A solution for the need for secure device to device communications is the use of a public key infrastructure (PKI) approach.
PKI is based on top of public key cryptography. Public key cryptography is different from symmetric cryptography by its use of two linked keys, one to encrypt and one to decrypt. In symmetric cryptography, an encryption algorithm E takes as input a plain text message M and a key K and produces a cypher text C. The decryption algorithm takes as input the cypher text C and the key K and produces the plain text message M:
E(M,K)=C
D(C,K)=M
Once a message is encrypted, barring some fault in the algorithm implementation or drastic advance in cryptanalysis, only somebody with a copy of the key can decrypt it. But also everybody with the key can decrypt it. Or decrypt it, modify it and re-encrypt it. If a group wishes to encrypt messages among members, either all share the same key, or need keys for each independent pairwise conversation. The first approach is quite insecure, and the second get unmanageable quite fast (number of keys is n*(n−1)/2).
The public key cryptography uses a public key Pk and a private key pk. The encryption/decryption algorithm work similarly:
E(M,Pk)=C
D(C,pk)=M
The advantages of the public key cryptography include publishing a public key while keeping it private key secret. This allows the sending of one-way messages to the owner of a key pair. This has an advantage of keeping the pool of keys scales linearly to the number of parties in a conversation. In addition, a plain text message can be encrypted using a private key. It also allows the certificate approach for executing documents or acting electronically in a legally binding manner.
Referring toFIG. 385, an arrangement is disclosed where each node maintains an independent public/private key pair. In this way the grandparent certificateauthority certificate authority4240 is able to maintain a chain of certificates linking each key to the public key of aparent4242 or4244 to arespective child4246,4248 or4250, respectively. This permits a down-tree network of trust to be created with thegrandparent4240 maintaining the authority of thechild4242,4244 public keys, as well as thegrandchild4246,4248 and4250.
This allows two of the parent or grandparent nodes to mutually authenticate. Once a secure channel is established (using a standard key exchange protocol) the two parties can exchange their public keys and together with the certificate chain reaching up to the common parent. At that point, each party can verify the signatures through all of the generations and ensure that they are part of the same “organization”.
Note that the same scheme can be employed to delegate authority from thegrandchildren4246,4248,4250 to theparent certificate authorities4242,4244 and devices. For instance, the certificate authority can certify the following statement: “[Delegated (certificate authority1) Public Key4242] can sign device public keys forclass 1 and delegate operation Z”. Then the Delegatedcertificate authority14242 can sign the public key of Device 1.1 and add the “delegate operation Z” to it. Now if4242 connects to4246 it will send its public key along with “Delegated certificate authority1” public key to4246.Node4246 will respond with its own public key and the “Delegated certificate authority2” public key. Each device uses its own copy of the Root certificate authority public key to verify the signature on the delegated certificate authority, and the now certified delegated certificate authority to verify the public key of the device. After this verification, “Device 1.1” signs a statement that it intends to request “operation Z” and sends it to “Device 2.1”. Since “Device 2.1” now has a certified public key from “Device 1.1” it can use it to verify the signature on the request. Since it has the augmented delegation statement from the parent of “Device 1.1”, it can now configure itself to allow such requests to perform “operation Z” received subsequently.
Of course, if adequate memory is available, the sets of parent certificate authorities and signatures can be cached after the first exchange, and later expunged after some amount of time passed since the last time they were needed.
In an environment in which thehospital bed10 operates, such as that shown diagrammatically inFIG. 386A-386B, each manufacturer may function as a certificate authority for communications relevant to that manufacturer, and generate its key pair. The manufacturer will then submit the public key to the root certificate authority via manual key transport. The root certificate authority, in this case, ahospital bed10 device, will sign the certificate authority public key, then will also create and digitally sign a manifest granting the manufacturing certificate authority the authority to sign device keys and to further delegate those keys the specific operations. This will be beneficial in that devices may delegate powers. For example,lift devices4252 could be delegated the authority to request specificmodel hospital bed10sto articulate; diagnostic devices would be delegated the authority to tap into ahospital bed10 state and to fully articulate anyhospital bed10; servers may be delegated the authority to requesthospital bed10 status, set and clear alarms, retrieve patient weight;hospital bed10swould be delegated the authority to push alarms and PPM status to servers.
A server certificate authority can be configured by for various manufacturers and used to sign keys and manifests for feature installations, such as enabling a function on a device only as necessary.
Another special set of certificate authority is used for diagnostic devices. They are tablet computers issued by the services organization to the field technicians. These devices are intended to be used for on-site configuration, identifying faults and verifying functionality during scheduled maintenance, as such they are quite powerful. Being small and multi-functional, there is a possibility that they get misplaced or misappropriated. To prevent such a device which is no longer under the physical control of the owner, authorized technician from manipulating or interfering with a hospital bed10 (or lift), given the fact that the technicians use the tablet to connect to a custom service application to receive the work orders or to refresh the manuals and schematics stored on the tablet to request a short-lived (˜1 week) signature and delegation from the diagnostic device certificate authority. The technician will send his or her credentials (user name and password) to the diagnostic device certificate authority, together with the device public key. The diagnostic device certificate authority will contact the directory service and validate the credentials, and if they are valid then return a digital signature and a delegation manifest valid for the next period (the 1 week mentioned earlier, or could be one month).
Yet another class of certificate authorities is used to sign public keys for any 3rd party extension devices that plug-in or communicate with a particular device. The manufacturing certificate authority will interact with the device (hospital bed10 or lift) at the final stages of manufacturing, around the time that the current production image is downloaded into the flash. The certificate authority will generate the key pair (since the CPU power in the device itself is sometimes limited); sign the public key; create and sign the delegation manifest, associate the public key with the serial number of the finished device and save into a log.
This would be facilitated by writing in to the devices flash memory that the device key pair, the manifest and its signature, all the public keys and signature on the chain of trust from the manufacturing certificate authority to the root certificate authority destroy its copy of the device private key.
The diagnostic devices are off the shelf tablets, so the manufacturing step does not apply to them. As described earlier, the diagnostic tablets will get their certificates through the periodic check-in process. Such an arrangement would allow for improved security and easing of inter-device communications.
Although certain illustrative embodiments have been described in detail above, variations and modifications exist within the scope and spirit of this disclosure as described and as defined in the following claims.

Claims (26)

The invention claimed is:
1. A patient support apparatus comprising
a mattress having a plurality of inflatable zones,
a main input device being inaccessible to a patient lying on the mattress and accessible to a caregiver to selectively and individually control a firmness of each zone of the plurality of the inflatable zones,
a frame having multiple support sections including a head section, a seat section, a thigh section, and a foot section, wherein the frame supports the mattress, and
a self-egress button that, when activated by the patient, results in the patient support apparatus being adjusted to a patient egress configuration to facilitate a patient to exit the patient support apparatus, the patient egress configuration comprising the head section being raised, the thigh and foot sections being lowered so as to be generally coplanar with the seat section, and at least a portion of the mattress being further inflated to increase firmness.
2. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, wherein the main input includes a graphical user interface (GUI) touch screen that is configured to receive inputs from the caregiver.
3. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 2, wherein the main input includes a locking mode which requires the caregiver to enter a personal identification number (PIN) to access a display screen on the GUI.
4. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, further comprising a siderail and wherein the patient input comprises a hand-held pendant that is removably coupleable to the siderail, the siderail including a mount for the pendant and the pendant including a receiver to releasably attach the pendant to the siderail in an orientation that positions inputs on the pendant in the line of sight of a patient positioned on the patient support apparatus in a supine position.
5. A patient support apparatus comprising
a mattress having a plurality of inflatable zones,
a main input device being inaccessible to a patient lying on the mattress and accessible to a caregiver to selectively and individually control a firmness of each zone of the plurality of the inflatable zones, and
a patient input being accessible to the patient to control the firmness of the plurality of the inflatable zones simultaneously,
a frame having multiple support sections including a head section, a seat section, a thigh section, and a foot section, wherein the frame supports the mattress, and
a self-egress button that, when activated by the patient, results in the patient support apparatus being adjusted to a patient egress configuration to facilitate a patient to exit the patient support apparatus, the patient egress configuration comprising the head section being raised, the thigh and foot sections being lowered so as to be generally coplanar with the seat section, and at least a portion of the mattress being further inflated to increase firmness.
6. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 5, further comprising a hand-held patient control pendant and the self-egress button is located on the hand-held patient control pendant.
7. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 6, wherein the portion of the mattress that is further inflated in response to use of the self-egress button includes a seat zone of the mattress.
8. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 7, wherein the portion of the mattress that is further inflated in response to use of the self-egress button further includes a thigh zone of the mattress.
9. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 5, further comprising a siderail coupled to the frame and the self-egress button is coupled to the siderail at a location accessible to the patient.
10. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 5, wherein information regarding use of the self-egress button is sent from the patient support apparatus to an electronic medical record (EMR) system.
11. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 10, further comprising a graphical user interface (GUI) accessible to a caregiver and wherein, in response to use of the self-egress button by the patient, the GUI displays an option of charting information regarding the use of the self-egress button to the patient's EMR.
12. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 11, wherein the GUI displays a chart button that, when selected, results in the GUI displaying a confirmation screen which the caregiver uses to confirm that the information is to be charted to the patient's EMR.
13. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 11, wherein the GUI displays a history button that is selected to access a history of the patient's self-egress data that has been charted to the patient's EMR previously.
14. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 5, wherein when the self-egress button is used by the patient, a nurse call system coupled to the patient support apparatus is signaled to notify a caregiver to lower a siderail of the patient support apparatus to facilitate the patient in exiting the patient support apparatus.
15. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 14, further comprising a caregiver input and wherein one or more conditions are programmable by a caregiver using the caregiver input, and wherein if the one or more conditions are met when the patient uses the self-egress button, a signal is sent to a nurse call system coupled to the patient support apparatus to notify a caregiver to assist the patient in exiting the patient support apparatus.
16. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 15, wherein the patient support apparatus includes a network with a plurality of arranged in a network with multiple levels and the nurse call system includes a node connected to the network of the patient support apparatus, and wherein each node maintains an independent public/private key pair such that a grandparent certificate authority maintains a chain of certificates linking each key to the public key of a parent or to a respective child to create a down-tree network of trust to be established.
17. A patient support apparatus comprising
a mattress having a plurality of inflatable zones,
a main input device being inaccessible to a patient lying on the mattress and accessible to a caregiver to selectively and individually control a firmness of each zone of the plurality of the inflatable zones, and
a patient input being accessible to the patient to control the firmness of the plurality of the inflatable zones simultaneously,
a frame,
a siderail supported by the frame and movable vertically relative to the frame,
a controller,
a sensor operable to provide a signal to the controller indicative of the status of a patient supported on the patient support apparatus, and
a notification system coupled to the controller, the notification system having an armed condition and a disarmed condition, the notification system operable to process signals from the controller which, based on the sensor signal, provide an indication of the status of the patient compared to established conditions, and, if the status of the patient deviates from an established acceptable condition, provide a visual indication of the deviation by illuminating a grip portion of the siderail in a first manner if the status of the patient is within an acceptable condition and in a second manner if the status of the patient is outside of an acceptable operating condition,
wherein the grip portion does not illuminate if the notification system is disarmed and the sensors indicate that a patient is supported on the frame, or if the notification system is armed and the sensors indicate that a patient is in a proper position on the frame, and
wherein the grip portion illuminates in a first manner if the notification system is disarmed and the sensors indicate that a patient is not on the frame, and
wherein the grip portion illuminates in a second manner if the notification system is armed and the sensors indicate that a patient is not in a proper position on the frame.
18. A patient support apparatus comprising
a mattress having a plurality of inflatable zones,
a main input device being inaccessible to a patient lying on the mattress and accessible to a caregiver to selectively and individually control a firmness of each zone of the plurality of the inflatable zones, and
a patient input being accessible to the patient to control the firmness of the plurality of the inflatable zones simultaneously,
a frame;
an air box; and
wherein the mattress is supported by the frame and includes a head section, a foot section, and a seat section between the head section and foot section, the mattress including a cushion layer; an outer ticking layer including an upper surface portion positioned to support a patient; a microclimate structure positioned within the outer ticking layer and between the cushion layer and the upper surface portion, the microclimate structure comprising an upper layer, at least a portion of the upper layer being vapor and liquid permeable, a middle layer being air permeable, and a lower layer being liquid impermeable, wherein the air box is operable to move air through the microclimate structure and into the interior of the outer ticking.
19. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, wherein the mattress comprises a turning assembly positioned in an outer ticking, the turning assembly including a plate structure having a lower plate, an intermediate plate pivotable relative to the lower plate about a first axis generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of the mattress, the first axis positioned on a first side of the intermediate plate, and an upper plate pivotable relative to the intermediate plate about a second axis generally parallel to the longitudinal axis of the mattress, the second axis positioned on a second side of the intermediate plate opposite from the first axis, the turning assembly further including a first pair of bladders positioned between the lower plate and the intermediate plate and inflatable to cause rotation of the intermediate plate relative to the lower plate, and a second pair of bladders positioned between the intermediate plate and the upper plate and inflatable to cause rotation of the upper plate relative the intermediate plate.
20. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 19, wherein the lower plate and intermediate plate are coupled through a first hinge and the intermediate plate and the upper plate are coupled through a second hinge.
21. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, wherein the patient support apparatus comprises
a frame,
a controller,
a sensor operable to provide a signal to the controller indicative of the status of a patient supported on the patient support apparatus, and
a power drive wheel coupled to the frame and in communication with the controller,
wherein the controller utilizes the information from the sensor regarding the status of the patient and modifies the operation of the power drive wheel based on the sensor information.
22. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, wherein the patient support apparatus includes a radio frequency based authentication means for identifying a caregiver to allow an appropriate caregiver to control the functionality of the patient support apparatus.
23. A patient support apparatus comprising
a mattress having a plurality of inflatable zones,
a main input device being inaccessible to a patient lying on the mattress and accessible to a caregiver to selectively and individually control a firmness of each zone of the plurality of the inflatable zones, and
a patient input being accessible to the patient to control the firmness of the plurality of the inflatable zones simultaneously,
wherein the patient support apparatus further comprises an integrated sequential compression means for providing sequential compression therapy to the limbs of a patient supported on the patient support apparatus.
24. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, wherein the patient support apparatus comprises a first graphical user interface (GUI) touch screen assembly and a second GUI touch screen assembly, each of the first and second GUIs configured to receive inputs from the caregiver, the first and second GUIs having the same components but positioned on opposite sides of the patient support apparatus, the components being adapted to be assembled in different configurations to adjust for the position of the respective GUI on the patient support apparatus.
25. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, further comprising means for comparing a current patient weight to prior information to determine if the current information indicates a deviation from expected values and prompt a user to confirm that the current patient weight should be accepted and charted to an electronic medical record.
26. The patient support apparatus ofclaim 1, further comprising support arm means for supporting a user interface in a position accessible to a patient supported in a supine position on the patient support apparatus and to allow the patient to reposition the user interface.
US16/727,1362015-05-292019-12-26Patient support apparatusActiveUS11135110B2 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application NumberPriority DateFiling DateTitle
US16/727,136US11135110B2 (en)2015-05-292019-12-26Patient support apparatus
US17/492,870US12350211B2 (en)2015-05-292021-10-04Patient support apparatus
US19/024,940US20250186279A1 (en)2015-05-292025-01-16Patient support apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (11)

Application NumberPriority DateFiling DateTitle
US201562168596P2015-05-292015-05-29
US201562169270P2015-06-012015-06-01
US201562197294P2015-07-272015-07-27
US201562210098P2015-08-262015-08-26
US201562256233P2015-11-172015-11-17
US201562256408P2015-11-172015-11-17
US201562256406P2015-11-172015-11-17
US201662300340P2016-02-262016-02-26
PCT/US2016/034908WO2016196403A1 (en)2015-05-292016-05-29Patient support apparatus
US201715577581A2017-11-282017-11-28
US16/727,136US11135110B2 (en)2015-05-292019-12-26Patient support apparatus

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application NumberTitlePriority DateFiling Date
US15/577,581ContinuationUS10517784B2 (en)2015-05-292016-05-29Patient support apparatus
PCT/US2016/034908ContinuationWO2016196403A1 (en)2015-05-292016-05-29Patient support apparatus

Related Child Applications (1)

Application NumberTitlePriority DateFiling Date
US17/492,870ContinuationUS12350211B2 (en)2015-05-292021-10-04Patient support apparatus

Publications (2)

Publication NumberPublication Date
US20200323717A1 US20200323717A1 (en)2020-10-15
US11135110B2true US11135110B2 (en)2021-10-05

Family

ID=57441932

Family Applications (4)

Application NumberTitlePriority DateFiling Date
US15/577,581ActiveUS10517784B2 (en)2015-05-292016-05-29Patient support apparatus
US16/727,136ActiveUS11135110B2 (en)2015-05-292019-12-26Patient support apparatus
US17/492,870Active2036-08-14US12350211B2 (en)2015-05-292021-10-04Patient support apparatus
US19/024,940PendingUS20250186279A1 (en)2015-05-292025-01-16Patient support apparatus

Family Applications Before (1)

Application NumberTitlePriority DateFiling Date
US15/577,581ActiveUS10517784B2 (en)2015-05-292016-05-29Patient support apparatus

Family Applications After (2)

Application NumberTitlePriority DateFiling Date
US17/492,870Active2036-08-14US12350211B2 (en)2015-05-292021-10-04Patient support apparatus
US19/024,940PendingUS20250186279A1 (en)2015-05-292025-01-16Patient support apparatus

Country Status (6)

CountryLink
US (4)US10517784B2 (en)
EP (2)EP3304511B1 (en)
JP (2)JP6730327B2 (en)
CN (2)CN118078551A (en)
AU (2)AU2016270661B2 (en)
WO (1)WO2016196403A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication numberPriority datePublication dateAssigneeTitle
US20210401380A1 (en)*2020-06-252021-12-30Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Incontinence prediction systems and methods
US20230162587A1 (en)*2021-11-192023-05-25Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Authorization system for integrated feature of support apparatus
US12053423B2 (en)2019-12-302024-08-06Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with electro-mechanical braking system
US12350211B2 (en)2015-05-292025-07-08Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus

Families Citing this family (92)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication numberPriority datePublication dateAssigneeTitle
US9038217B2 (en)*2005-12-192015-05-26Stryker CorporationPatient support with improved control
US11246776B2 (en)2005-12-192022-02-15Stryker CorporationPatient support with improved control
WO2007092886A2 (en)*2006-02-082007-08-16Hill-Rom Services, Inc.User module for a patient support
US10741284B2 (en)2015-10-022020-08-11Stryker CorporationUniversal calibration system
US10507158B2 (en)2016-02-182019-12-17Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus having an integrated limb compression device
US10489661B1 (en)2016-03-082019-11-26Ocuvera LLCMedical environment monitoring system
US10441483B2 (en)2016-07-202019-10-15Stryker CorporationEmergency patient motion system
US10231649B2 (en)2016-10-212019-03-19Stryker CorporationService scheduling and notification systems for patient support apparatuses
US12285383B2 (en)*2016-10-212025-04-29Zoll Medical CorporationSystem and methods for adaptive body positioning during chest compressions
US10028875B2 (en)2016-12-062018-07-24Hatchmed CorporationElectronic device mount for releasably attaching to equipment in a hospital room
US10600204B1 (en)2016-12-282020-03-24OcuveraMedical environment bedsore detection and prevention system
US11172892B2 (en)2017-01-042021-11-16Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus having vital signs monitoring and alerting
US10973720B2 (en)*2017-04-072021-04-13Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Image based monitoring of the state of a device
US11103398B2 (en)*2017-05-172021-08-31Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Flexible overhead arm
US11202729B2 (en)2017-06-272021-12-21Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus user interfaces
US10811136B2 (en)2017-06-272020-10-20Stryker CorporationAccess systems for use with patient support apparatuses
US11484451B1 (en)2017-06-272022-11-01Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus user interfaces
US11337872B2 (en)2017-06-272022-05-24Stryker CorporationPatient support systems and methods for assisting caregivers with patient care
US11382812B2 (en)2017-06-272022-07-12Stryker CorporationPatient support systems and methods for assisting caregivers with patient care
US11810667B2 (en)2017-06-272023-11-07Stryker CorporationPatient support systems and methods for assisting caregivers with patient care
US11304865B2 (en)2017-06-272022-04-19Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus with adaptive user interface
US11096850B2 (en)2017-06-272021-08-24Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus control systems
US10980689B2 (en)*2017-07-142021-04-20Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatuses with personal electronic device charging
US10601971B2 (en)2017-10-032020-03-24Hatchmed CorporationPortable electronic device holder with assistance request button and method powering portable electronic device
US11895256B2 (en)2017-10-032024-02-06Hatchmed CorporationHall monitor for a health care facility
US11627212B2 (en)2017-10-032023-04-11Hatchmed CorporationClamp to attach electronic device holder to bed rail
US11071393B2 (en)2017-10-042021-07-27Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Apparatus for adding hospital bed functionality to an at-home bed
GB2569362B (en)2017-12-152022-04-06Sydehealth LtdA dental display system
US10799403B2 (en)2017-12-282020-10-13Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with controlled auxiliary wheel deployment
US11071662B2 (en)2017-12-282021-07-27Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with controlled auxiliary wheel speed
AU2019201323B2 (en)*2018-02-272020-03-05Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support surface control, end of life indication, and x-ray cassette sleeve
US11344228B2 (en)*2018-05-022022-05-31Wernher OvallePatient monitoring device and system
TWI711777B (en)2018-07-062020-12-01第一傳動科技股份有限公司Linear actuator with cushion mechanism
US12327631B2 (en)2018-07-272025-06-10Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Apparatus and method for updating software in a patient support apparatus using a memory toggle
US11458052B2 (en)*2018-08-012022-10-04Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Skin injury resistant occupant support structures and methods for resisting skin injuries
US11839306B2 (en)*2018-08-282023-12-12Atlantic Furniture, Inc.Murphy bed chest
US11404149B2 (en)2018-08-302022-08-02Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Systems and methods for EMR vitals charting
DE102019105532B4 (en)*2018-09-272025-02-20Co12 Gmbh Support device for supporting a body part of a user
US11229568B2 (en)2018-09-302022-01-25Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Mattress support for adding hospital bed functionality to an in-home bed
US11400001B2 (en)2018-10-012022-08-02Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Method and apparatus for upgrading a bed to include moveable components
US20200100597A1 (en)2018-10-012020-04-02Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Method and apparatus for upgrading a bed to include moveable components
US11304860B2 (en)2018-11-212022-04-19Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with auxiliary wheel system
US11484447B2 (en)2018-11-212022-11-01Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with controlled auxiliary wheel deployment
US12150905B2 (en)2018-11-272024-11-26Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus with notification system
US20200187672A1 (en)*2018-12-142020-06-18Spc Asset Management, LlcAdjustable sleeping system with force control
US20200268579A1 (en)2019-02-262020-08-27Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Bed interface for manual location
US11911325B2 (en)2019-02-262024-02-27Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Bed interface for manual location
EP3701857B1 (en)2019-02-282023-10-04Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus having vital signs and sepsis display apparatus
US12329717B2 (en)*2019-03-292025-06-17Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Control system for a patient therapy device
US11931312B2 (en)2019-03-292024-03-19Hill-Rom Services, Inc.User interface for a patient support apparatus with integrated patient therapy device
US11974964B2 (en)2019-03-292024-05-07Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus with integrated patient therapy device
EP3721848B1 (en)*2019-04-122023-11-01Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Mattress retention assembly and radio frequency weld in surface covers
EP4111971A1 (en)2019-04-122023-01-04Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Method and apparatus for indicating continence state of a patient on a bed
US11304866B2 (en)2019-04-172022-04-19Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Head of bed access
USD916745S1 (en)*2019-05-082021-04-20Sleep Number CorporationDisplay screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
US20200375828A1 (en)2019-05-302020-12-03Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support interface device
WO2020257475A1 (en)*2019-06-212020-12-24Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus with caregiver reminders
US11723822B2 (en)2019-07-102023-08-15Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Security latch for user interface housing
US11648162B2 (en)2019-07-312023-05-16Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Head extension and transport handle system
KR20210041703A (en)*2019-10-082021-04-16엘지전자 주식회사Moving bed robot
WO2021090928A1 (en)*2019-11-072021-05-14川崎重工業株式会社Nursing care bed system and nursing care bed position changing device
US12178757B2 (en)2019-12-302024-12-31Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with auxiliary wheel control systems
US11806296B2 (en)2019-12-302023-11-07Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with controlled auxiliary wheel speed
US20210244582A1 (en)*2020-02-102021-08-12Lucas DeckerBuilt-In Stretcher Battery System
US11877844B2 (en)2020-02-192024-01-23Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Respiration detection using radar
US20210298683A1 (en)2020-03-302021-09-30Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Bed-based ballistocardiogram apparatus and method
US12042268B2 (en)2020-03-312024-07-23Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient body monitoring using radar
US11963918B2 (en)*2020-04-202024-04-23Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient bed having active motion exercise
CN111449850B (en)*2020-04-202023-01-10黄松Layer number adjustable medical stretcher
US12080420B2 (en)2020-05-292024-09-03Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Wireless location learning
EP3940711A1 (en)2020-07-162022-01-19Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient bed interface for manual validation of patient identification
US12165767B2 (en)*2020-08-102024-12-10Hill-Rom Services, Inc.System and method for identification of remotely accessed patient device
US11727768B2 (en)2020-08-132023-08-15Hatchmed CorporationHall monitor for a health care facility
US12042451B2 (en)2020-08-212024-07-23Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Cable-free bed with wireless pillow speaker
CN223262603U (en)*2020-09-182025-08-26希尔-罗姆服务公司 Hose for a patient support cover including a pneumatically operated assembly
US11881219B2 (en)2020-09-282024-01-23Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Voice control in a healthcare facility
KR102535530B1 (en)*2020-12-182023-05-24대한민국Foldable Calf Fixing Device
US12186241B2 (en)2021-01-222025-01-07Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Time-based wireless pairing between a medical device and a wall unit
US12279999B2 (en)2021-01-222025-04-22Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Wireless configuration and authorization of a wall unit that pairs with a medical device
US12053421B2 (en)2021-03-312024-08-06Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Hospital bed CPR activation assembly
AU2022314293A1 (en)*2021-07-192024-02-22Umano Medical Inc.Patient support apparatus and mattress therefor
EP4135369A1 (en)2021-08-132023-02-15Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Wireless configuration and authorization of a wall unit that pairs with a medical device
JP7667563B2 (en)2021-09-172025-04-23西川株式会社 Electrical Therapy Device
JP7234324B1 (en)2021-09-282023-03-07三菱電機インフォメーションシステムズ株式会社 NOTIFICATION RECEIVING DEVICE, NOTIFICATION METHOD AND NOTIFICATION RECEIVING PROGRAM
US20250132580A1 (en)*2021-10-122025-04-24Stryker CorporationPatient Support Systems For Charging Batteries Of Patient Transport Apparatuses
WO2023064470A1 (en)2021-10-152023-04-20Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Person support systems and methods including a proning mode
US12178761B2 (en)*2022-03-172024-12-31A-Dec, Inc.Chair preset icon synchronization
AU2023257277A1 (en)*2022-04-202024-07-11Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus having a backup power system
CN115006134B (en)*2022-06-142023-06-09南通大学附属医院 A hospital bed for elderly patients to go to the toilet
CN114777664B (en)*2022-06-202022-09-27山西天宝集团有限公司Wind power tower cylinder flange parameter control auxiliary tool and method thereof
CN115089839B (en)*2022-08-252022-11-11柏斯速眠科技(深圳)有限公司Head detection method and system and control method and system of sleep-assisting device
WO2024145325A1 (en)*2022-12-282024-07-04Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus with cpr features

Citations (72)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication numberPriority datePublication dateAssigneeTitle
US4195287A (en)1977-11-281980-03-25Mathis James CFire and absence detection and alarm system for bed occupants
US4680790A (en)1985-08-221987-07-14Joerns Healthcare, Inc.Bedside control module for healthcare stations and the like
US4803744A (en)*1987-05-191989-02-14Hill-Rom Company, Inc.Inflatable bed
US4982466A (en)*1988-10-121991-01-08Leggett & Platt, IncorporatedBody support system
US5307051A (en)1991-09-241994-04-26Sedlmayr Steven RNight light apparatus and method for altering the environment of a room
US5450639A (en)1993-12-211995-09-19Hill-Rom Company, Inc.Electrically activated visual indicator for visually indicating the mode of a hospital bed castor
US5542138A (en)1995-02-061996-08-06Williams; Terry N.Bedside control unit for a hospital bed
US5647079A (en)*1996-03-201997-07-15Hill-Rom, Inc.Inflatable patient support surface system
US5654694A (en)1994-09-231997-08-05Bed-Check CorporationMobile battery powered patient bed and chair occupancy monitoring system
US5664270A (en)1994-07-191997-09-09Kinetic Concepts, Inc.Patient interface system
US5699038A (en)1993-07-121997-12-16Hill-Rom, Inc.Bed status information system for hospital beds
US5808552A (en)1996-11-251998-09-15Hill-Rom, Inc.Patient detection system for a patient-support device
US5913774A (en)*1997-10-161999-06-22Stryker CorporationHospital bed mattress with an adjustable firmness perineal end section
US6021533A (en)1997-08-252000-02-08Hill-Rom, Inc.Mattress apparatus having a siderail down sensor
US6078261A (en)1998-11-102000-06-20Alert Systems, Inc.System for monitoring a bed patient
US6234642B1 (en)1998-04-152001-05-22Dewert Antriebs- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh & Co. KgBed with improved lighting features
US20020044059A1 (en)2000-05-052002-04-18Reeder Ryan A.Patient point of care computer system
US20020151990A1 (en)1993-07-122002-10-17Ulrich Daniel J.Bed status information system for hospital beds
US6544200B1 (en)2001-08-312003-04-08Bed-Check CorporationElectronic patient monitor with automatically configured alarm parameters
US6591437B1 (en)*1996-04-152003-07-15Kci Licensing, Inc.Therapeutic mattress and built-in controls
JP2003524483A (en)1999-12-292003-08-19ヒル−ロム サービシーズ,インコーポレイティド Hospital bed
US20030197614A1 (en)2002-04-182003-10-23Bed-Check CorporationApparatus for lighting a patient monitor front panel
US6771172B1 (en)1999-11-112004-08-03General Electric CompanyPortable patient monitor with alarm light integrated into handle
US6781517B2 (en)1998-04-142004-08-24Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Communication and bed function control apparatus
US6791460B2 (en)1999-03-052004-09-14Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient position detection apparatus for a bed
US6822571B2 (en)2001-11-152004-11-23Stryker CorporationPatient movement detection system for a bed including a load cell mounting assembly
US6823549B1 (en)*2003-05-142004-11-30Donna N. HamptonAlternating pressure cushion with inflatable lumbar support
US20060010601A1 (en)2002-04-192006-01-19Riley Carl WHospital bed obstacle detection device and method
US20060049936A1 (en)2004-08-022006-03-09Collins Williams F JrConfigurable system for alerting caregivers
US7038588B2 (en)2001-05-042006-05-02Draeger Medical Infant Care, Inc.Apparatus and method for patient point-of-care data management
US20060097879A1 (en)2004-10-262006-05-11Lippincott Kathy JSIDS and apnea monitoring system
US20060101581A1 (en)2004-10-292006-05-18Blanchard Frederick WPatient support apparatus
US20060271207A1 (en)2004-11-052006-11-30Mark ShawMattress monitoring system
US7145467B2 (en)2001-08-202006-12-05Beacon Medical Products LlcMedical gas alarm system
US7154397B2 (en)2001-08-032006-12-26Hill Rom Services, Inc.Patient point-of-care computer system
US20070156031A1 (en)2003-12-042007-07-05Hoana Medical, Inc.Systems and methods for intelligent medical vigilance
US20070157385A1 (en)2005-12-192007-07-12Stryker CorporationHospital bed
US20070163045A1 (en)2005-11-072007-07-19Stryker CorporationPatient handling device including local status indication, one-touch fowler angle adjustment, and power-on alarm configuration
US7253366B2 (en)2004-08-092007-08-07Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Exit alarm for a hospital bed triggered by individual load cell weight readings exceeding a predetermined threshold
US20070268480A1 (en)2006-05-182007-11-22Kaye Mitchell GBed angle sensor for reducing ventilator-associated pneumonia
US20080005838A1 (en)2006-07-052008-01-10Stryker CorporationSystem for detecting and monitoring vital signs
US20080169931A1 (en)2007-01-172008-07-17Hoana Medical, Inc.Bed exit and patient detection system
US7506390B2 (en)2002-09-062009-03-24Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus having controller area network
US7557718B2 (en)2004-04-302009-07-07Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Lack of patient movement monitor and method
US20090302782A1 (en)2008-06-102009-12-10Tesla Controls CorporationSystems and methods for rules based, automated lighting control
US20100073168A1 (en)2008-09-192010-03-25Tallent Dan RSystem and Method for Reporting Status of a Bed
US7805785B2 (en)*2006-09-142010-10-05Martin B Rawls-MeehanMethods and systems of an adjustable bed
US20110068928A1 (en)2009-09-182011-03-24Riley Carl WSensor control for apparatuses for supporting and monitoring a person
US20110133935A1 (en)2009-12-042011-06-09Marc BeltmannWireless Patient Monitoring System
US20110163885A1 (en)*2005-08-102011-07-07Craig PoulosAdjustable therapeutic mattress
JP2011172913A (en)2010-01-142011-09-08Hill-Rom Services IncUser-support apparatus height indicator
US8056165B2 (en)*1995-08-042011-11-15Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Inflatable mattress for a bed
US20120023670A1 (en)2010-07-302012-02-02Zerhusen Robert MPerson-support apparatus indicator
US20120089419A1 (en)2010-10-082012-04-12Huster Keith AHospital bed with graphical user interface having advanced functionality
US20120110735A1 (en)2010-11-102012-05-10Kirill AndrienkoSiderail assembly for patient support apparatus
US20120312196A1 (en)2011-06-082012-12-13Newkirk David COverbed table with wireless power transfer
JP2013013738A (en)2005-07-082013-01-24Hill-Rom Services IncControl unit for patient support
JP2013039300A (en)2011-08-192013-02-28Toyama PrefecturePatient behavior identification method and patient behavior detection system
US20130219622A1 (en)2010-11-222013-08-29Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Control of hospital bed chair egress configuration based on patient physiology
US8544126B2 (en)*2005-12-192013-10-01Stryker CorporationPatient support with improved control
US20140062342A1 (en)2012-08-292014-03-06Daniel R. MurphyBed Exit Night Light
US8671487B2 (en)*2011-09-122014-03-18Douglas Allen DewellAir mattress having only two inflate/deflate ports for inflating four or six separate bladders
US20140257571A1 (en)*2013-03-112014-09-11Select Comfort CorporationSwitching means for an adjustable foundation system
US20140259410A1 (en)2013-03-142014-09-18Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Multi-alert lights for hospital bed
US20140265181A1 (en)2013-03-142014-09-18Stryker CorporationReconfigurable transport apparatus
US20140292529A1 (en)2011-11-112014-10-02Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Person support apparatus
US20140313700A1 (en)2011-10-092014-10-23Chg Hospital Beds Inc.Illuminable indicator for a bed
US20140323816A1 (en)2009-07-102014-10-30Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Systems for Patient Support, Monitoring and Treatment
US8878679B2 (en)2012-05-162014-11-04Alissa ArndtBaby monitor light
US20140375451A1 (en)2013-06-252014-12-25Joel Sterling DouglasSmart monitoring sensor system for monitoring mobility
US9271579B2 (en)*2013-04-052016-03-01Rapid Air LlcAdjustable mattress with foam inserts and air chambers
US9635953B2 (en)*2013-03-142017-05-02Sleepiq Labs Inc.Inflatable air mattress autofill and off bed pressure adjustment

Family Cites Families (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication numberPriority datePublication dateAssigneeTitle
US6119291A (en)*1995-08-042000-09-19Hill-Rom, Inc.Percussion and vibration therapy apparatus
JPH10315874A (en)*1997-05-201998-12-02Nippon Antenna Co Ltd In-vehicle mobile phone holder
US7587368B2 (en)*2000-07-062009-09-08David Paul FelsherInformation record infrastructure, system and method
JP2002044214A (en)*2000-07-212002-02-08Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Stand for portable wireless device
FR2827326B1 (en)2001-07-132004-07-30Jean Marie Depaillat HOUSING INSTALLATION IN SEVERAL INDIVIDUAL ZONES IN A COMMON AREA AND A COMMON ZONE
US7843855B2 (en)*2001-09-132010-11-30Network Foundation Technologies, LlcSystem and method for broadcasting content to nodes on computer networks
US7018157B2 (en)*2001-09-202006-03-28Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Powered transport apparatus for a bed
JP5055523B2 (en)2004-09-242012-10-24ストライカー コーポレイション Ambulance simple bed and hydraulic lifting mechanism therefor
JP5537806B2 (en)*2005-07-082014-07-02ヒル−ロム サービシーズ,インコーポレイティド Hospital bed pressure control
US8572778B2 (en)*2007-03-302013-11-05Hill-Rom Services, Inc.User interface for hospital bed
US7971300B2 (en)*2007-10-092011-07-05Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Air control system for therapeutic support surfaces
US8104117B2 (en)*2008-03-132012-01-31Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Siderail and control unit therefor
WO2010078047A2 (en)*2008-12-172010-07-08Stryker CorporationPatient support
US8650682B2 (en)*2010-03-022014-02-18Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Multifunctional display for hospital bed
US8717181B2 (en)*2010-07-292014-05-06Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Bed exit alert silence with automatic re-enable
CN103476378A (en)2011-04-122013-12-25利纳克有限公司Electric actuator system
US9482707B2 (en)2012-01-092016-11-01L&P Property Management CompanyOccupancy detection for automated recliner furniture
EP2819629B1 (en)*2012-03-022016-12-28Stryker CorporationPatient support
US9228885B2 (en)*2012-06-212016-01-05Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support systems and methods of use
US9463124B2 (en)*2013-01-152016-10-11Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Microclimate system for a patient support apparatus
CN118078551A (en)2015-05-292024-05-28希尔-罗姆服务公司 Patient support equipment

Patent Citations (78)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication numberPriority datePublication dateAssigneeTitle
US4195287A (en)1977-11-281980-03-25Mathis James CFire and absence detection and alarm system for bed occupants
US4680790A (en)1985-08-221987-07-14Joerns Healthcare, Inc.Bedside control module for healthcare stations and the like
US4803744A (en)*1987-05-191989-02-14Hill-Rom Company, Inc.Inflatable bed
US4982466A (en)*1988-10-121991-01-08Leggett & Platt, IncorporatedBody support system
US4986738A (en)*1988-10-121991-01-22Leggett & Platt IncorporatedAirflow control system pump and housing
US5307051A (en)1991-09-241994-04-26Sedlmayr Steven RNight light apparatus and method for altering the environment of a room
US20020151990A1 (en)1993-07-122002-10-17Ulrich Daniel J.Bed status information system for hospital beds
US5699038A (en)1993-07-121997-12-16Hill-Rom, Inc.Bed status information system for hospital beds
US5450639A (en)1993-12-211995-09-19Hill-Rom Company, Inc.Electrically activated visual indicator for visually indicating the mode of a hospital bed castor
US5664270A (en)1994-07-191997-09-09Kinetic Concepts, Inc.Patient interface system
US5654694A (en)1994-09-231997-08-05Bed-Check CorporationMobile battery powered patient bed and chair occupancy monitoring system
US5542138A (en)1995-02-061996-08-06Williams; Terry N.Bedside control unit for a hospital bed
US8056165B2 (en)*1995-08-042011-11-15Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Inflatable mattress for a bed
US5647079A (en)*1996-03-201997-07-15Hill-Rom, Inc.Inflatable patient support surface system
US6591437B1 (en)*1996-04-152003-07-15Kci Licensing, Inc.Therapeutic mattress and built-in controls
US5808552A (en)1996-11-251998-09-15Hill-Rom, Inc.Patient detection system for a patient-support device
US6021533A (en)1997-08-252000-02-08Hill-Rom, Inc.Mattress apparatus having a siderail down sensor
US5913774A (en)*1997-10-161999-06-22Stryker CorporationHospital bed mattress with an adjustable firmness perineal end section
US6781517B2 (en)1998-04-142004-08-24Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Communication and bed function control apparatus
US6234642B1 (en)1998-04-152001-05-22Dewert Antriebs- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh & Co. KgBed with improved lighting features
US6078261A (en)1998-11-102000-06-20Alert Systems, Inc.System for monitoring a bed patient
US6791460B2 (en)1999-03-052004-09-14Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient position detection apparatus for a bed
US6771172B1 (en)1999-11-112004-08-03General Electric CompanyPortable patient monitor with alarm light integrated into handle
JP2003524483A (en)1999-12-292003-08-19ヒル−ロム サービシーズ,インコーポレイティド Hospital bed
US20020044059A1 (en)2000-05-052002-04-18Reeder Ryan A.Patient point of care computer system
US7038588B2 (en)2001-05-042006-05-02Draeger Medical Infant Care, Inc.Apparatus and method for patient point-of-care data management
US7154397B2 (en)2001-08-032006-12-26Hill Rom Services, Inc.Patient point-of-care computer system
US7145467B2 (en)2001-08-202006-12-05Beacon Medical Products LlcMedical gas alarm system
US6544200B1 (en)2001-08-312003-04-08Bed-Check CorporationElectronic patient monitor with automatically configured alarm parameters
US6822571B2 (en)2001-11-152004-11-23Stryker CorporationPatient movement detection system for a bed including a load cell mounting assembly
US20030197614A1 (en)2002-04-182003-10-23Bed-Check CorporationApparatus for lighting a patient monitor front panel
US20060010601A1 (en)2002-04-192006-01-19Riley Carl WHospital bed obstacle detection device and method
US7506390B2 (en)2002-09-062009-03-24Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus having controller area network
US6823549B1 (en)*2003-05-142004-11-30Donna N. HamptonAlternating pressure cushion with inflatable lumbar support
US20070156031A1 (en)2003-12-042007-07-05Hoana Medical, Inc.Systems and methods for intelligent medical vigilance
US7557718B2 (en)2004-04-302009-07-07Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Lack of patient movement monitor and method
US20060049936A1 (en)2004-08-022006-03-09Collins Williams F JrConfigurable system for alerting caregivers
US7253366B2 (en)2004-08-092007-08-07Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Exit alarm for a hospital bed triggered by individual load cell weight readings exceeding a predetermined threshold
US20060097879A1 (en)2004-10-262006-05-11Lippincott Kathy JSIDS and apnea monitoring system
US8413271B2 (en)*2004-10-292013-04-09Stryker CorporationPatient support apparatus
US20060101581A1 (en)2004-10-292006-05-18Blanchard Frederick WPatient support apparatus
US20060271207A1 (en)2004-11-052006-11-30Mark ShawMattress monitoring system
US9220650B2 (en)2005-07-082015-12-29Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus having alert light
JP2013013738A (en)2005-07-082013-01-24Hill-Rom Services IncControl unit for patient support
US20110163885A1 (en)*2005-08-102011-07-07Craig PoulosAdjustable therapeutic mattress
US20070163045A1 (en)2005-11-072007-07-19Stryker CorporationPatient handling device including local status indication, one-touch fowler angle adjustment, and power-on alarm configuration
US7690059B2 (en)*2005-12-192010-04-06Stryker CorporationHospital bed
US8544126B2 (en)*2005-12-192013-10-01Stryker CorporationPatient support with improved control
US20070157385A1 (en)2005-12-192007-07-12Stryker CorporationHospital bed
US20070268480A1 (en)2006-05-182007-11-22Kaye Mitchell GBed angle sensor for reducing ventilator-associated pneumonia
US20080005838A1 (en)2006-07-052008-01-10Stryker CorporationSystem for detecting and monitoring vital signs
US7805785B2 (en)*2006-09-142010-10-05Martin B Rawls-MeehanMethods and systems of an adjustable bed
US20080169931A1 (en)2007-01-172008-07-17Hoana Medical, Inc.Bed exit and patient detection system
US20090302782A1 (en)2008-06-102009-12-10Tesla Controls CorporationSystems and methods for rules based, automated lighting control
US20100073168A1 (en)2008-09-192010-03-25Tallent Dan RSystem and Method for Reporting Status of a Bed
US20140323816A1 (en)2009-07-102014-10-30Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Systems for Patient Support, Monitoring and Treatment
US20110068928A1 (en)2009-09-182011-03-24Riley Carl WSensor control for apparatuses for supporting and monitoring a person
US20110133935A1 (en)2009-12-042011-06-09Marc BeltmannWireless Patient Monitoring System
JP2011172913A (en)2010-01-142011-09-08Hill-Rom Services IncUser-support apparatus height indicator
US20120023670A1 (en)2010-07-302012-02-02Zerhusen Robert MPerson-support apparatus indicator
US10857050B2 (en)*2010-10-082020-12-08Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Hospital bed control and charting
US20120089419A1 (en)2010-10-082012-04-12Huster Keith AHospital bed with graphical user interface having advanced functionality
US8745786B2 (en)2010-11-102014-06-10Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Siderail assembly for patient support apparatus
US20120110735A1 (en)2010-11-102012-05-10Kirill AndrienkoSiderail assembly for patient support apparatus
US20130219622A1 (en)2010-11-222013-08-29Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Control of hospital bed chair egress configuration based on patient physiology
US20120312196A1 (en)2011-06-082012-12-13Newkirk David COverbed table with wireless power transfer
JP2013039300A (en)2011-08-192013-02-28Toyama PrefecturePatient behavior identification method and patient behavior detection system
US8671487B2 (en)*2011-09-122014-03-18Douglas Allen DewellAir mattress having only two inflate/deflate ports for inflating four or six separate bladders
US20140313700A1 (en)2011-10-092014-10-23Chg Hospital Beds Inc.Illuminable indicator for a bed
US20140292529A1 (en)2011-11-112014-10-02Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Person support apparatus
US8878679B2 (en)2012-05-162014-11-04Alissa ArndtBaby monitor light
US20140062342A1 (en)2012-08-292014-03-06Daniel R. MurphyBed Exit Night Light
US20140257571A1 (en)*2013-03-112014-09-11Select Comfort CorporationSwitching means for an adjustable foundation system
US20140265181A1 (en)2013-03-142014-09-18Stryker CorporationReconfigurable transport apparatus
US20140259410A1 (en)2013-03-142014-09-18Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Multi-alert lights for hospital bed
US9635953B2 (en)*2013-03-142017-05-02Sleepiq Labs Inc.Inflatable air mattress autofill and off bed pressure adjustment
US9271579B2 (en)*2013-04-052016-03-01Rapid Air LlcAdjustable mattress with foam inserts and air chambers
US20140375451A1 (en)2013-06-252014-12-25Joel Sterling DouglasSmart monitoring sensor system for monitoring mobility

Non-Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Communication pursuant to Article 94(3) EPC in the counterpart EP application No. 16 804 188.7-1113, 4 pages.
Extended EP Search Report, Related European Application No. 16804188.7, dated Jan. 31, 2019, 8 pages.
First Office Action, Related Chinese Patent Application No. 201680044452.7 based on PCT/US2016/034908, dated May 7, 2019, 15 pages.
Notice of Refusal in Related Chinese Application 201680044452.7 dated Mar. 4, 2021, 7 pages.
Office Action, Related Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-248916, based on PCT/US2016/034908, dated Dec. 25, 2018, (6 pages).
Office Action, Related Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-248916, based on PCT/US2016/034908, dated Oct. 15, 2019, (4 pages).
PCT Search Report and Written Opinion for PCT/US2016/034908, completed Jul. 29, 2016.
Translation of First Office Action, Related Chinese Patent Application No. 201680044452.7 based on PCT/US2016/034908, dated May 7, 2019, 22 pages.
Translation of Office Action, Related Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-248916, based on PCT/US2016/034908, dated Dec. 25, 2018, (7 pages).
Translation of Office Action, Related Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-248916, based on PCT/US2016/034908, dated Oct. 15, 2019, (5 pages).

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication numberPriority datePublication dateAssigneeTitle
US12350211B2 (en)2015-05-292025-07-08Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Patient support apparatus
US12053423B2 (en)2019-12-302024-08-06Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with electro-mechanical braking system
US12318337B2 (en)2019-12-302025-06-03Stryker CorporationPatient transport apparatus with electro-mechanical braking system
US20210401380A1 (en)*2020-06-252021-12-30Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Incontinence prediction systems and methods
US11903746B2 (en)*2020-06-252024-02-20Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Incontinence prediction systems and methods
US20230162587A1 (en)*2021-11-192023-05-25Hill-Rom Services, Inc.Authorization system for integrated feature of support apparatus

Also Published As

Publication numberPublication date
AU2021201522A1 (en)2021-04-01
US20200323717A1 (en)2020-10-15
US12350211B2 (en)2025-07-08
US20220023122A1 (en)2022-01-27
AU2016270661B2 (en)2021-04-22
CN108028005A (en)2018-05-11
EP3304511A1 (en)2018-04-11
EP3304511A4 (en)2019-03-06
EP4129170B1 (en)2025-02-19
JP2020168436A (en)2020-10-15
US20180161225A1 (en)2018-06-14
EP4129170A1 (en)2023-02-08
AU2016270661A1 (en)2017-12-07
US10517784B2 (en)2019-12-31
WO2016196403A1 (en)2016-12-08
EP3304511B1 (en)2022-09-28
AU2021201522B2 (en)2022-08-04
JP6730327B2 (en)2020-07-29
US20250186279A1 (en)2025-06-12
JP2018519032A (en)2018-07-19
CN118078551A (en)2024-05-28

Similar Documents

PublicationPublication DateTitle
AU2021201522B2 (en)Patient support apparatus
US10952920B2 (en)Patient support apparatus having an integrated limb compression device
US12102579B2 (en)Patient support apparatus having patient lift
US8393026B2 (en)Hospital bed
EP1965679A2 (en)Hospital bed
JP2010155084A (en)Hospital bed

Legal Events

DateCodeTitleDescription
FEPPFee payment procedure

Free format text:ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:AWAITING TC RESP., ISSUE FEE NOT PAID

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

ASAssignment

Owner name:HILL-ROM SERVICES, INC., INDIANA

Free format text:ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ZERHUSEN, ROBERT M.;HEIMBROCK, RICHARD H.;SHAH, ARPIT;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20191230 TO 20210718;REEL/FRAME:057199/0001

Owner name:HILL-ROM SERVICES, INC., INDIANA

Free format text:ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:LACHENBRUCH, CHARLES A.;REEL/FRAME:057199/0115

Effective date:20150908

STPPInformation on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text:PUBLICATIONS -- ISSUE FEE PAYMENT VERIFIED

STCFInformation on status: patent grant

Free format text:PATENTED CASE

ASAssignment

Owner name:HILL-ROM HOLDINGS, INC., ILLINOIS

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:BARDY DIAGNOSTICS, INC., ILLINOIS

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:VOALTE, INC., FLORIDA

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:HILL-ROM, INC., ILLINOIS

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:WELCH ALLYN, INC., NEW YORK

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:ALLEN MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC., ILLINOIS

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:HILL-ROM SERVICES, INC., ILLINOIS

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

Owner name:BREATHE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text:RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST AT REEL/FRAME 050260/0644;ASSIGNOR:JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:058517/0001

Effective date:20211213

MAFPMaintenance fee payment

Free format text:PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment:4


[8]ページ先頭

©2009-2025 Movatter.jp